SYSTUS RefManAnalysisVol4 en PDF

SYSTUS
2019
REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL
(VOL.4)
www.esi-group.com
SYSTUS 2019
REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL
(VOL.4)
© 2019 by ESI Group
Published: January 2019
GL/SYST/18/08/04/A
This documentation is the confidential and proprietary product of ESI Group.
Any unauthorized use, reproduction, or transfer of this documentation is strictly prohibited.
This documentation is subject to limited distribution and restricted disclosure.
All PAM- and SYS- product names as well as other products belonging to ESI's portfolio are
tradenames or trademarks of ESI Group, unless specifically mentioned. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Contents
CHAPTER 13 POST PROCESSING 971

13.1 Introduction 971
13.2 Average Node Stress and Strain 977
13.2.1 Introduction 977
13.2.2 Field of Application 978
13.2.3 Files 979
13.2.4 Method of Calculation 980
13.2.5 Input Data 981
13.2.6 Example 982
13.2.7 Location of Gaussian Points for Calculation of Stress 983
13.2.8 Average for Thick Shells 988
13.2.9 Average Transient 990
13.3 Combination of Results 993
13.3.2 Linear Combinations 994
13.3.3 Quadratic and Absolute Combination 996
13.3.4 Storage on File of Combinations 997
13.3.5 Combination of Fourier Series Terms (harmonics) 999
13.3.6 Complex Combination 1001
13.4 Merging of Results 1003
13.4.2 The Command MERGE 1004
13.4.3 Merging of Posts 1006
13.4.4 Merging of Cards 1007
13.4.5 Merging of Transient Files 1008
13.5 Cross Sections 1009
13.5.2 Files 1009
13.5.4 Problem Size Limits 1010
13.5.5 Input data 1011
13.5.6 Example 1017
13.6 Postprocessing Module 1018
13.6.2 Files 1019
13.6.5 Example 1029
CONTENTS
13.7 Printing of Results 1033

13.7.1 The PRINT Command 1033
13.7.2 The Command PRINT TRANSIENT or MODE 1035
13.7.3 Command PRINT CONSTRAINTS 1037
13.8 The Command REARRANGE 1039
13.9 The Command FORCE 1040
13.10 The Command STRESS 1042
13.10.1 General Case 1043
13.10.2 Stresses in Laminated Shells 1046
13.10.3 Stresses in Beams using Section Database 1047
13.11 The command SPLIT 1054
13.12 The Command MINMAX 1056
13.13 The Command SHELL 1057
13.14 Three-Dimensional 1061
13.15 Local 1065
13.15.2 Files 1065
13.15.3 Input Data 1066
13.15.4 Example 1071
13.16 A Posteriori Error Estimator 1076
13.16.1 General 1076
13.16.2 Application Fields 1077
13.16.3 Input Data 1077
13.16.4 Error Analysis 1077
CHAPTER 14 POSTPROCESSING AND GRAPHIC OUTPUT 1079

14.2 Open - Close 1081
14.3 Post-Processing File Result Conversion 1082
14.3.1 CONVERT Procedure 1082
14.3.2 Post-Processing File Conversion - Printout 1084
14.3.3 Dataset 1085
14.4 Averaging Post-Processing 1098
14.5 Visualization of Results 1101
14.6 The Command CURVE POSTPROCESSING 1112
14.6.3 Example 1115
14.7 The Command CURVE TRANSIENT 1116
14.8 The Command CURVE FUNCTION 1121
14.9 The Command CURVE SATURATION 1122
14.10 The Command CURVE TABULATION 1123
14.11 The Command CURVE AVERAGE 1124
14.12 Specific Post-Processing for Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis 1127
- ii - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 15 TOPOLOGY OF ELEMENTS 1131
CHAPTER 16 SYSTEMS OF AXES 1133

16.1 Global Axes (X, Y, Z) 1133
16.2 Local Axes (x, y, z) 1134
16.2.1 One-Dimensional Elements 1134
16.2.2 Two-Dimensional Elements 1136
16.2.3 Three-Dimensional Elements 1143
CHAPTER 17 MATERIAL BEHAVIOR LAWS 1145

17.1 Notations 1145
17.2 Elasticity 1147
17.2.1 General 1147
17.2.2 Isotropic Linear Elasticity 1149
17.2.3 Anisotropic Linear Elasticity 1151
17.2.4 Non-Linear Elasticity 1154
17.3 Elastoplasticity 1159
17.3.1 Theory 1160
17.3.2 User-Programmed Criterion 1168
17.3.3 Description of Models and Input Data 1172
17.4 Viscoplasticity 1209
17.4.2 Non-Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models 1210
17.4.3 Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models (Model = 21) 1213
17.4.4 Chaboche Model 1216
17.4.5 Thermo-Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior Models (Model = 51) 1218
17.4.6 Rigid Viscoplastic Model (Model = 61) 1219
17.4.7 Elastoviscoplastic Model Coupled with Creep Damage (Model 71) 1221
17.4.8 Creep Models Applicable to Tube Elements 1223
17.5 Viscoelasticity 1226
17.5.2 Generalized MAXWELL Model (Linear Viscoelasticity) (Model = 11) 1227
17.5.3 Thermo-Viscoelastic Model (Model = 12) 1229
17.5.4 Non-Linear Viscoelasticity Model (Model = 13) 1234
17.6 Hyperelasticity 1236
17.6.1 Theory 1236
17.7 User-Programmed Behavior Law 1240
17.7.1 Principle 1240
17.7.2 Programming and Interpretation of Arguments 1241
17.8 Large Displacements and Large Strains 1247
17.8.1 Spatial Beam and Shell Options 1247
17.8.2 Two-Dimensional and Three-Dimensional Options 1249
17.9 Transient File Force Contents 1251
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - iii -

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
17.9.2 General Structure of the Force File 1252

17.9.3 Spatial SHELL - Spatial BEAM Option 1254
17.9.4 Two-Dimensional Option 1262
17.9.5 Three-Dimensional Option 1272
17.9.6 COQ8 Three-Dimensional Shell Option 1282
17.9.7 COQD Axisymmetrical Harmonic Shell Option 1283
17.9.8 COQT Thermal Shell Option 1284
17.10 References 1285
CHAPTER 18 COMMON BLOCKS 1289

18.1 Blank Common 1289
18.2 Common COMAIL 1293
18.3 Common COMMAT and COMMIL 1294
18.4 Common COMTRA 1304
CHAPTER 19 RIK'S METHOD 1305

19.1 General 1305
19.2 Constant Arc-Length Incrementation 1306
19.3 Variable Arc-Length Incrementation: Arc-Length Updated at Each Increment 1309
19.4 Variable Arc-Length Incrementation associated with a Buckling Calculation 1310
19.5 Note 1311
CHAPTER 20 SECTION MANAGEMENT DATABASE 1313

20.1 Simple Database Section 1314
20.2 Standard Database Section 1315
CHAPTER 21 LINEAR EQUATION SOLVERS 1319

21.2 Characteristics 1321
21.2.1 Standard Solvers 1321
21.2.2 External Solvers 1323
21.2.3 Summary Table of Solvers Properties 1323
21.3 Input Data 1324
21.3.1 Type 1324
21.3.2 Properties 1324
21.3.3 Parameters 1325
21.3.4 Extract Labels for the Treatment 1326
21.4 Notes 1327
CHAPTER 22 SPACE TRANSFORMATIONS 1329

22.2 Infinite Unidirectional Transformation (type 1) 1331
22.3 Ring or Sphere Transformation (Type 2) 1332
22.4 Square Ring or Square Sphere Transformation (Type 4) 1333
22.5 User Transformation (Type 8 or 9) 1334
22.6 Post-Processing 1335
- iv - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 23 DYNAMIC ELEMENTS OF ROTORS 1337

23.1 Generalities - Modelization 1337
23.2 Complex Eigenfrequencies 1338
23.3 Harmonic Stationnary Response 1339
23.4 Time History Excitation Response 1340
23.5 Example 1341
INDEX i
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL -v-

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 13 POST PROCESSING
13.1 Introduction

13.1 INTRODUCTION
Various types of result are computed by the routines SOLVE, TRANSIENT and
CALCULATE, according to the type of structure. The user may however wish to carry out
further operations, such as:
l Calculation of additional types of result, for example yield criteria or principal stresses,
l Combination of computed results,
l Calculation of results at points other than those used by the analysis routines.
The purpose of this chapter is to describe the means by which results may be combined,
extrapolated or interpolated. The following operations are also described:
l the merging of files of input data or results created by several analyses of the same problem,
l the creation of files from other files, such as obtaining a results file from a transient file,
l the printing of results.
Definitions
Before describing the various operations, it is essential to define certain files to which reference
is often made :
δN random access file of displacements at nodes (FAD)
m random access file of reactions at nodes (FAD)
em random access file of forces in elements (FAD)
σN random access file of stresses at nodes (FAD)

(FM)
ϵN random access file of strains at nodes (FAD)
random access file consisting of one or more of the files listed above
Results file (FR)
(FAD)
sequential file of stresses and strains calculated at the Gaussian points
Stress file (FC)
of elements (FSEQ)
Transient file (FT) direct access file of various results computed by the routine TRANSIENT
Postprocessing file (FD) random access file on which are held sets of results (FAD)
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 971 -

© 2019 ESI Group
13.1 Introduction
Summary of operations
AVERAGE calculates from values at Gaussian points the stress and strain at
nodes.
Stress file (FC (FM)
COMBINE l linear : printing of linear combinations

δN , rN, em
l store : calculation and storage on the results file, of linear
combinations.
δN , rN, em,
l Fourier : calculation and storage on the transient file, of
results computed by Fourier series expansion (routine
SOLVE HARMONIC)
Transient file
MERGE l combines several permanent results files into a single file,

which may itself be saved as a permanent file.
l if the label CARD is present, a results file is created from data

read from a transient file.
CROSS SECTION l Calculates results, including certain yield criteria, at points

other than the nodes of the mesh and writes them to a
postprocessing file.
- 972 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

© 2019 ESI Group
13.1 Introduction
POSTPROCESSING l Derives various types of result at nodes or at the centers of

elements. This routine can calculate a wider range of results
than can be calculated by CROSS SECTION, but not at
arbitrary points of the mesh. This routine creates a
postprocessing file.
PRINT l Prints sets of results held on the postprocessing file:
The sequences in which the various routines are called are shown in the following flow charts
(Tables 13.1, 13.2 and 13.3).

© 2019 ESI Group
13.1 Introduction
Table 13.1

© 2019 ESI Group
13.1 Introduction
Table 13.2

© 2019 ESI Group
13.1 Introduction
Table 13.3

© 2019 ESI Group
13.2 Average Node Stress and Strain
13.2 AVERAGE NODE STRESS AND STRAIN

13.2.1 Introduction
For a structure subject to externally applied loads, the finite element method enables the
calculation of displacements at each of the nodes of the mesh. From these node displacements,
and the assumed variation of the solution over each element, stresses at any point of an element
may be computed. It may be seen therefore that, in this method, values of stress are associated
with particular elements: stress is computed for a given point of a given element
In the displacement formulation of the finite element method, although the computed
displacement field is continuous throughout the structure, computed stresses are in general
discontinuous across interfaces between elements. As a result, the analysis generally yields
several values of the stress tensor at a node.
The purpose of the routine AVERAGE is to assign to each node a unique value of the stress
tensor, and so to make the computed stress field continuous throughout the structure. This is an
approximation, and the stress field so defined no longer satisfies the global equilibrium
conditions for the structure.
To carry out the approximation, the following two steps must be taken:
l Computation of node stresses in each element,
l For each node, averaging of stresses computed at the node in each of the neighboring
elements to obtain the unique node values.

The second step poses no problem because it requires only the calculation of an arithmetic
mean. In the following discussion it is only the first step which is of interest, and for
convenience this is referred to as averaging.
It is clear that there are many possible ways of carrying out averaging. For example, one could
assign to every node of an element the value of stress calculated at the centroid of the element
(FORCE), or alternatively the stresses could be calculated directly at the nodes.
It is found that for a given type of element, stresses are computed most accurately at the
Gaussian integration points of a lower order formula.
Stresses at nodes therefore are computed by extrapolating the values calculated at these points.
Note:
l Throughout this paragraph, the word "stresses" is taken to refer to the contents of the stress file,
that is stresses and/or strains.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.2.2 Field of Application

The averaging routine is used in the analysis of continuous media and of three dimensional
harmonic problems.
SOLVE
The calculation of stresses at lower order Gaussian points is performed by the routine SOLVE.
These stresses are written to the stress file (FC).
Stresses computed at the centroids of elements are written to the forces file (permanent file of
results).
It is possible to use this routine for thin shells but caution should by used. Average values at
sharp edges of shell element assemblies may be meaningless, because element values are
expressed in local axis systems which are different from on side of the edge to the other.
A special AVERAGE routine exists for thick shells (see Chapter 13.2.8). A special average
routine also exists for TRANSIENT files. It allows averaging of stresses contained in a
TRANSIENT file for two and three dimensional volume elements after transient plasticity
calculation (see Chapter 13.2.9).

© 2019 ESI Group
13.2.3 Files
The routine AVERAGE uses as input files:
l the input data file
l the stress file
l the forces file
and creates as output files :

l the local file of node stresses (σn)
l the local file of node strains (εn)
These output files are included in the permanent file of results.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.2.4 Method of Calculation

An element is defined by a certain number of nodes, and a formula for the interpolation of
displacement between these nodes.
For example:
For the isoparametric element with 8 nodes shown in
Figure 13.2.1, there is quadratic variation of displacement
along each side.
Since that variation depends only upon values of
displacement at the nodes of the side in question, there is
interelement continuity of displacement.
Figure 13.1
Stresses are in general obtained by differentiation of displacements. If displacements are
interpolated by a polynomial of degree n, then stresses are interpolated by a polynomial of
degree n-1.
In the calculation of stiffness and other matrices, integrations are carried out by means of
Gaussian quadrature formulae with numbers of points consistent with the degree of polynomials
used to interpolate displacement.
It is found empirically that in the calculation of stresses, the most accurate results are obtained at
the points of the Gaussian quadrature formula, which enables stresses subsequently to be
interpolated by a polynomial of degree n-1. This polynomial may also be used to extrapolate
stresses to the nodes of the element.
To illustrate the technique, let us consider once more the rectangular element with 8 nodes.
Figure 13.2
This element has quadratic variation of displacement. In the evaluation of integrals over the
element, the 9-point Gaussian formula, the points of which are represented by crosses in
Figure. 13.2, is used.
Since the stresses vary linearly in each direction, for the purpose of averaging it is only
necessary to calculate stresses at the 4 Gaussian points A, B, C and D shown in Fig. 13.2. Then
by linear extrapolation stresses may be computed at the points A1, B1, C1 and D1, and by a
second linear extrapolation at the nodes of the element.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.2.5 Input Data

AVERAGE (LABEL) EXTRACT
ELEMENT m1 m2 TO mn DIMENSION n or MATERIALS l1 l2 TO ln
CORRECTION
ELEMENT m1 m2 TO mn DIMENSION n or MATERIALS l1 l2 TO ln
RETURN
The command AVERAGE

LABEL = STRESS
STRAIN
FORCE (the default option)
The labels STRESS and FORCE may not both be present.
The command AVERAGE FORCE assigns the value of stress at the centroid to all nodes of an
element. For elements with linear variation of displacement, the commands AVERAGE
STRESS and AVERAGE FORCE are equivalent.
EXTRACT requests printing of the computed results.
The command ELEMENT
This optional command is used to select elements. By default, averaging is carried out for all
elements of the mesh.
The command CORRECTION
This command may be used to specify that only certain elements be taken into account when
calculating stress at some nodes. It is therefore possible to average in the usual way for the
whole structure, then to modify the averaging procedure for certain nodes by choosing for these
nodes, by means of a command ELEMENT which follows the command CORRECTION, the
adjacent elements in which it is considered stress is computed more accurately.
This command is operative only if averaging is performed on data read from a STRESS file.
The command CORRECTION may for example be used in the calculation of stress at nodes of
surface elements, from results for those elements alone.
Side A
Figure 13.3

© 2019 ESI Group
Let us consider the two dimensional structure shown in Figure 13.3.

Surface elements have been placed on side A, because stress is more accurately computed in
these elements (see Chapter 8.4). By averaging for the entire structure (ELEMENTS
DIMENSION 2) and then specifying under CORRECTION that only surface elements are to
be taken into account (ELEMENTS DIMENSION 1), stresses at nodes 1, 2, 3 and 4 may be
computed from results for the surface elements I, II and III alone.
13.2.6 Example
SEARCH DATA STRESS 10
AVERAGE STRESS EXTRACT
ELEMENT DIMENSION 2
CORRECTION
ELEMENT DIMENSION 1
RETURN
SAVE RESULTS 11
The routine prints nodes stresses after averaging and creates the corresponding file of results.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.2.7 Location of Gaussian Points for Calculation of Stress

The method described in the preceding paragraph for the rectangular element with 8 nodes may
be generalized to all elements whose type is "continuous media" or "three dimensional
harmonic".
In this paragraph are shown the Gaussian integration points at which stresses are calculated, and
those used in the evaluation of stiffness and other matrices, for the 1, 2 and 3 dimensional
elements of the types of structure for which averaging is carried out.
Notes:
l In the following diagrams, small typeface numbers represent Gaussian points, and large
typeface numbers nodes of elements.

l Drawing on left: Gaussian points for integration.
l Drawing on right: Gaussian points at which stresses are calculated.
One dimensional elements

Element with 2 nodes
Two dimensional elements


© 2019 ESI Group
Element with 6 nodes created with the old data structure (Chapter 1.1.9).
To obtain this distribution of Gauss points with the new data structure, the label TRIANGLE
must be added under the DEFINITION procedure:
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
ELEMENT (list) / (other properties) TRIANGLE = 1
Three dimensional elements

Elements with 8 nodes

© 2019 ESI Group
8 Gaussian points 1 Gaussian point

27 Gaussian points 8 Gaussian points

2 Gaussian points 1 Gaussian point


© 2019 ESI Group

Element with 15 nodes created with the old data structure (cf. 1.1.9).

To obtain this distribution of Gaussian points with the new data structure, the label TRIANGLE
must be added under the DEFINITION procedure:
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
ELEMENT (list) / (other properties) TRIANGLE = 1

© 2019 ESI Group
1 Gaussian point 1 Gaussian point


© 2019 ESI Group
13.2.8 Average for Thick Shells

a) Introduction
This procedure may be used to calculate stresses at nodes for:
l Thick shell elements (see 8.3.3.4) using STRESS file (stresses at integration points).
l Thin shell elements (see 8.3.3.4) using FORCE file (forces at the center of the element).
Calculated stresses are stored in NODE STRESS file. DATA file is modified (option becomes
THREE DIMENSIONAL).
b) Description
The only elements used in this procedure are those with the following types:
l 2008, 2208, 2006, 2206, 2403 and 2404 for thick shells.
l 2004, 2204, 2003, 2203, 2403 and 2404 for thin shells.
No calculation is performed for elements with other types.

Differentiation between THICK shells and THIN shells is made according to the type of the
first element encountered.
Stresses are calculated as required :
l on upper surface(level h/2 or vy if this value was supplied)
l on middle surface(level 0)
l on lower surface(level -h/2 or vpy if this value was supplied)
Stresses are calculated in user specified axes. Default is global axes.Once stresses at nodes are
calculated, it is only possible to perform rotation of the axis system.
c) Files
Input files:
l DATA
l STRESS if no label ONLY for THICK shells
l NODAL STRESS if label ONLY (change of axes only).
l FORCES if no label ONLY for THIN shells.
Output files:
l DATA modified (option becomes 3D)
l NODE STRESS
d) Input data
Command AVERAGE

© 2019 ESI Group
SHELL Mandatory label to use AVERAGE SHELL procedure

VARIABLE Mandatory label for variable thickness shells
UPPER or These labels select the surface where stresses are required (default is
LOWER middle surface). These labels are exclusive.
AXES This label defines local axes in which stresses are calculated (cf. 1.4.5).
ONLY With this label the routine performs only an axis system change, if NODE
STRESSES have been previously calculated. If there is no label INVERSE,
stresses are transformed from global axes to user axes ; if there is the label
INVERSE, stresses are transformed from user axes to global axes.
EXTRACT print results (default = no print).
ELEMENTS command
This command selects elements for which averaging is done (by default all elements are
selected). Only elements with types 2006, 2206, 2008, 2208, 2003, 2203, 2004, 2204, 2403
and 2404 are used. The others are bypassed.
Example

AVERAGE SHELL EXTRACT UPPER AXES NODES 4 16 9
RETURN
e) Layered composite element (thick shells)

As for a non-layered composite shell, it is possible to average the stresses in one layer with the
aid of the command:
AVERAGE SHELL COMPOSITE LAYER i (EXTRACT)
SHELL Specifies that the shell is a composite laminated shell.

COMPOSITE
LAYER i Layer number
The other parameters are not modified.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.2.9 Average Transient

The scope of this procedure is:
1. For two-dimensional or three-dimensional plasticity, it calculates average stresses and strains at
nodes.
2. For two-dimensional plasticity only, if the INTEGRAL label is found, it calculates nodal stresses
and complementary information (displacement derivatives, strain energy at nodes...) necessary to
calculate the RICE integrals.
The only elements available for this procedure are :
in OPTION TWO-DIMENSIONAL :
l Triangles with type 2003, 2006, 2005
l Quadrangles with type 2004, 2008, 2012, 2007, with normal or reduced integration
in OPTION THREE-DIMENSIONAL :
l Parallelepipeds with type 3008, 3020, with normal or reduced integration
l Prisms with type 3015, with 6 or 9 integration points.
Files
In input:
l DATA
l TRANSIENT: Which must include not only mean forces but also values at the integration
points : this means at least one of the following labels : PLASTIC, UPDATE,
HYPERELASTIC or CREEP has been selected in the command BEHAVIOUR in
TRANSIENT analysis.
Even if the behavior of the structure is linear, the label PLASTIC has to be selected in order
that results at Gaussian points are created in TRANSIENT analysis.
In output:
l DATA
l TRANSIENT: The contents differ depending on the type of averaging:
type 1 : only the NODE STRESSES result in each card

type 2 : (if INTEGRAL label) on each card
o DISPLACEMENT result
o FORCES result (reduced size)
o NODE STRESSES, if present in the initial TRANSIENT file.
Note:
l Forces and nodal stresses records have the same size (11 values).

© 2019 ESI Group
Input data
AVERAGE TRANSIENT (STRESS n) (THRESHOLD) (DISPLACEMENT) --

(INTEGRAL) (DELTA)
CARD (list) or LAST
ELEMENTS (list) or DIMENSION j
COMPONENTS (list)
RETURN
See the syntax for the list in Chapter 1.3.4.

AVERAGE TRANSIENT command (mandatory command)
STRESS n defines the number of stress components per integration point in the
initial TRANSIENT file (default: n=40)
THRESHOLD some results do not have to be extrapolated since their threshold must
not be exceeded. This is true notably for plasticity or phase proportions.
When THRESHOLD label is used, the values at nodes will remain
within the limit of the extreme values existing in the considered
element..
DISPLACEMENT is used to store displacements in addition of averaged values, in order to
plot contours over deformed shape.
INTEGRAL if present, necessary information for the RICE integral is calculated.
DELTA label necessary in addition to INTEGRAL in order to obtain ΔJ for the case
of cyclic loading.
CARDS l1, m1, l2, m2, li, mi, lj, mj command
Selects the cards. By default, all the cards are taken into account.
Note:
l In the case of cyclic loading (label DELTA used in AVERAGE command) the cards must be given in
pairs. The pairs i and j, mi and mj must always be different. (for example : CARDS 1, 3, 2, 3 would give
false integration results).
LAST Indicates that the last stored card is taken without specifying its number.
In this case, the label LAST must follow the label CARD in place of
the number n.
ELEMENTS m1 m2 to mn command (optional command)
Selects elements (by default all the elements are used). All node calculations are performed only
on selected elements (even for intermediate nodes). Take care that each node requested is
surrounded by selected elements.

© 2019 ESI Group
COMPONENTS C1 ... Cn command

Selects components to average in the FORCE results (see Chapter 17 for card of FORCE
results).
Do not use this label with INTEGRAL.
RETURN command
Ends the AVERAGE TRANSIENT procedure.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.3 Combination of Results
13.3 COMBINATION OF RESULTS

13.3.1 Introduction
The purpose of the routine COMBINE is to print or store on file linear, quadratic or absolute
value combinations of load cases.
The COMBINATION OF FOURIER is used to obtain physical results on a meridian or
longitudinal section for harmonic loading.
The COMBINATION COMPLEX may be used to accumulate the different loads after a
harmonic response computation.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.3.2 Linear Combinations

The routine COMBINE calculates and prints linear combinations of load cases.
This is the default combination type.
Note:
l This routine is the only means of printing certain types of result, such as residues.
a) Files
Input files: DATA, RESULTS, STRESS
b) Input data
COMBINE (LABELS) (BOUNDARY)

Title / (Ci, ni) + (Cj, nj)...
LOAD n
RETURN
Description
Labels (may appear together)
l DISPLACEMENT`
l REACTION
l FORCE
l NODE STRESS and NODE STRAIN (Label taken by default ) (FM) (FR)
l VARIABLES
l VELOCITY
l ACCELERATION
l RESIDUE

© 2019 ESI Group
l STRESS and STRAIN (FC)

l BOUNDARY
for editing only minimum and maximum values
CRITERION
requests printing of the Tresca and von Mises criteria for stress and strain.
COORDINATES
requests printing of the coordinates of the Gaussian integration points.
AXES
requests printing of the axes associated with each Gaussian point.
The data specifying a linear combination may be presented in two ways:
l as a group of data consisting of a title zone, a slash (/), and pairs of values (Ci, ni) where Ci is
the factor by which the load case ni is to be multiplied.

l as the command LOAD, followed by the number of the load case under consideration.
(If this number is omitted or zero then all loads cases are analyzed).
The label CRITERION can be used only associated with the following labels: STRESS or
STRAIN.
The label AXES can be used only with the label COORDINATES.
Example:
Printing of displacements of load case 1.
COMBINE DISPLACEMENT
LOAD 1
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
13.3.3 Quadratic and Absolute Combination

Input data
COMBINE (LABELS) (TYPE) (BOUNDARY)

Title / (Ci, ni) + (Cj, nj)...
LOAD n
RETURN
Description
Labels are identical with those for linear combination.
Type = QUADRATIC calculate the square root of sum Ci*ni2
Type = ABSOLUTE calculate sum of Ci*|ni|
BOUNDARY for printing only minimum and maximum values.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.3.4 Storage on File of Combinations

The routine COMBINE may be used to calculate linear, quadratic or absolute value
combinations of certain results for a number of load cases, and store them on the results file in
place of the original data.
The file of input data is modified: the number of load cases is replaced by the number of
combinations, and the titles of load cases are replaced by titles of combinations.
a) Files
Input files: DATA, RESULTS (rn, δN, em, σN, εN)
Output files: DATA, RESULTS
b) Input data
COMBINE STORE (LABELS) (TYPE)

Title / (Ci, ni) + (Cj, nj) + ...
LOAD n
RETURN
Description
Labels (may appear together):
l DISPLACEMENT
l ACCELERATION
l VELOCITY
l REACTION FORCE (Label taken by default (FR))
l NODE STRESS and NODE STRAIN (FM)

© 2019 ESI Group
Type:
l Linear if not specified
l QUADRATIC for a quadratic combination (defined in Chapter 13.3.3.)
l ABSOLUTE for an absolute value combination (defined in Chapter 13.3.3.).
l as a group of data consisting of a title zone, a slash (/), and pairs of values (Ci, ni)
where Ci is the factor by which the load case ni is to be multiplied.

l as the command LOAD, followed by the number of the load case under
consideration.
(If this number is omitted or zero then all load cases are analyzed).
Notes:
l Input data and results are modified and may be saved on a permanent file (SAVE DATA
RESULTS).
l Nothing is printed. If the computed results are to be printed, then the command COMBINE should
be used as described in the preceding paragraph.
l The newly created load cases are numbered in the order of specification of combinations.
c) Example
Calculation and storage.
Load case 1 is multiplied by 2, and the resulting data is printed.
SEARCH DISPLACEMENT 1 DATA 1

COMBINE STORE DISPLACEMENT
LOAD 1 / 2 1
RETURN
COMBINE DISPLACEMENT
LOAD 1
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
13.3.5 Combination of Fourier Series Terms (harmonics)

The routine COMBINE may be used to calculate linear combinations of results obtained by
Fourier series decomposition. Each load case corresponds to a term (symmetric or
antisymmetric harmonic) of the series.
The ABSOLUTE and QUADRATIC labels cannot be used in this case.
The computed combinations are printed for various meridian planes or cross-sections, and
written to a file of type TRANSIENT with one card per plane.
a) Files
Input files: DATA, RESULTS
Output files: DATA, TRANSIENT
b) Input data
COMBINE FOURIER (Labels) (NOTHING)

VALUE v1, v2 TO v3 STEP v4
Title / (C1, n1) + (C2, n2) + ...
LOAD i
RETURN
Description of commands
The COMBINE FOURIER Command
Labels (may appear together) are as follows:
l DISPLACEMENT
l REACTION
l FORCE (Label taken by defaults FR)
l NODE STRESS) and NODE STRAIN) (FM)
l NOTHING : suppresses all printout.

© 2019 ESI Group
The VALUE Command (mandatory)

This command is followed by values which specify the planes for which results are to be
computed:
l the angle Ψ in degrees for axisymmetric structures ;
l the value of z for structures with translational symmetry.
DEFINITION OF LOAD CASES

l as a group of data consisting of a title zone, a slash (/), and pairs of values (Ci, ni) where Ci is
the factor by which the load case ni is to be multiplied.

l as the command LOAD, followed by the number of the load case under consideration.
(If this number is omitted or zero then all loads cases are analyzed).
Notes:
l The file created by this routine is a TRANSIENT file with one card per value of Ψ or z.
l If no data specifying a combination or load case is present, then a combination consisting of the
sum of all loads cases is automatically generated.
l The file DATA is modified by the routine COMBINE, so that it includes as many load cases as
combinations defined, and is compatible with the generated TRANSIENT file.
l To carry out postprocessing and analysis of the data held on the transient file created by
COMBINE it is first necessary to create, by means of the command MERGE, a RESULTS file.
c) Example
SEARCH DATA 1 RESULTS 1

COMBINE FOURIER
VALUE 0 TO 180 STEP 30
RETURN
SAVE DATA 2 TRANSIENT 2

© 2019 ESI Group
13.3.6 Complex Combination

This procedure works on TRANSIENT files from a computation in HARMONIC
RESPONSE (direct 11.5, modal 11.4.4). These TRANSIENT files have generally several
loads by card. COMPLEX COMBINATION is used to accumulate the different loads by
modifying their amplitude and their phase.
a) Input files
DATA
TRANSIENT (2 cards for each circular frequency: amplitude-phase)
b) Input data
SEARCH DATA TRANSIENT i

COMBINATION COMPLEX (REAL)
TITLE
…
PHASE (list) (DEGREES) (VARIABLE (FREQUENCY))
AMPLITUDE (list) (VARIABLE (FREQUENCY))
TABLES
t1 /
¦
tn /
RETURN
SAVE DATA TRANSIENT j
COMPLEX Command
This command starts the execution of the module. The calculations are done for all the cards
and all the types of result of the TRANSIENT in input. The optional label REAL is used to
obtain the results with the form (real part- imaginary part). By default: amplitude - phase. If the
TRANSIENT file has only one load, the command REAL is taken by default and a simple
transformation is obtained (amplitude – phase) in (real part – imaginary part).
TITLE optional this command is used to define a title (40 characters maximum) for
command loads combination considered.
PHASE (list) list of phase shifts between loads. The list must contain as many values
as there are loads. By default, all phase shifts are zero. If the
DEGREES label is included, phase shifts are expressed in degrees (by
default in radians).
AMPLITUDE list of amplitudes by which the loads are multiplied (one value per load).
(list) By default, in the presence of the command, all amplitudes are 1

© 2019 ESI Group
VARIABLE phase shifts and/or amplitudes vary according to circular frequency or

frequency if the FREQUENCY label is present. Values entered in the lists
are then the numbers of TABLES defining circular frequency or frequency
functions.
If TABLES are not included in the data file, the optional command TABLE
is used to define them.
c) Output data
DATA: Modified file including a unique load.
TRANSIENT: File containing for all cards the accumulation of loads.
d) Example: Accumulation of shifted loads which amplitude varies with frequency
SEARCH DATA TRANSIENT 100

COMBINE COMPLEX
TITLE
ACCU 1 OF 3 LOADS
PHASE 0. 45. 60. DEGREES
AMPLITUDE 1 1 2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY
TABLE
1/ 1 (0. 1.) (100. 1.) (101. 0.)
2/ 1 (0. 0.) (50. 1.) (100. 3.)
RETURN
SAVE DATA TRANSIENT 101

© 2019 ESI Group
13.4 Merging of Results
13.4 MERGING OF RESULTS

13.4.1 Introduction
The purpose of the routine MERGE is to merge into a single file several permanent results or
stress files relating to the same problem (i.e. the same mesh).
The command MERGE CARD creates a results file from specified cards of a TRANSIENT
file.
The command MERGE TRANSIENT is used to chain two transient files.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.4.2 The Command MERGE

The routine MERGE operates on permanent files.
a) Files
Input files: several RESULTS and DATA files.
Output files: local DATA and RESULTS files.
b) Input data
MERGE (label) i, j TO k (DATA n)
Description
Labels (may appear together) are as follows.
l DISPLACEMENT
l REACTION
l FORCE
l NODE STRESS Labels taken by default (FR)
(FM)
l NODE STRAIN
l STRESS (FC)
i, j TO k are the numbers of the permanent files to be merged :
l DATA i, j TO k
l RESULTS i, j TO k or
l STRESS i, j TO k.
The entire command must be entered on a single line of 80 characters.

© 2019 ESI Group
DATA n specifies that there is only one DATA file, with number n. In this case, every results
file must be composed of the same number of load cases as are included in the DATA files.
Notes:
l This routine creates temporary data, results and stress files, which may then be saved as
permanent files by the SAVE routine.

l The file of input data is modified; the number of load cases is set equal to the total number of
load cases of all files merged, and on the output files the load cases are numbered in
ascending order of their specification in the MERGE command.
l The following limitations apply:
o maximum number of problems = 048
o maximum number of load cases = 8000
l If, a requested type of result is not present in the input file, the corresponding part of the
output file is not written, but the error is not fatal for execution of the routine.
l The labels STRESS and STRESS NODES are incompatible.
c) Example
Merging of results files 1, 3, 4 and 5 by reference to DATA file 1.
MERGE STRESS 1, 3 TO 5 DATA 1

SAVE STRESS 10 DATA 10

© 2019 ESI Group
13.4.3 Merging of Posts

a) Files
Input files: Several POST files
Output files: One POST file.
b) Input data
MERGE (labels) POST i, j A k
Labels:
l SET: This command allows the user to gather the sets of several POST files in a single one.
Sets are gathered following the order of the POST files list.
l COMPONENT: This command allows the user to gather the components of two POST files
in a single one.
The local POST file can be stored using the SAVE command.
c) Example
MERGE SET POST 301 TO 303

SAVE POST 350
The POST350 file will contain sets of POST301 file; then sets of POST302 file, then those of
POST303 file.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.4.4 Merging of Cards

This routine does not operate on permanent files, but on local files.
a) Files
Input files : DATA, TRANSIENT or MODE SHAPE
Output files : DATA, RESULTS
b) Input data
MERGE (labels) CARDS or MODE SHAPE i, j TO k TIME
Description
Labels are as follows
l DISPLACEMENT
l VELOCITY
l ACCELERATION
l REACTION
l FORCE
l NODE STRESS
l NODE STRAIN(FM)
i j To k are the numbers of cards of the local TRANSIENT file to be copied to the
RESULT file. These numbers must be in ascending order.
MODE SHAPE the specified cards are picked up on the MODE SHAPE file.
TIME generate titles of the created load cases at each time step including the card
number and time. The DISPLACEMENT file of the transient is required to
read this information.

© 2019 ESI Group
Notes:
l The routine creates temporary data and results files which may then be saved as permanent files
by the routine SAVE.
l Note however that the local velocity and acceleration files cannot be saved, but may be printed by
the routine COMBINE.
l The file of input data is modified ; the number of load cases is set equal to the number of initial
load cases multiplied by the number of cards selected.
l On the output files, load cases are arranged by selected card (i, j...k).
The following limitations apply
Maximum number of load cases = 8000
Maximum number of cards = 2048
If a requested type of result is not present in the input file, the corresponding part of the output
file is not written, but the error is not fatal for execution of the routine.
c) Example
SEARCH TRANSIENT DATA 1

MERGE DISPLACEMENT CARDS 3, 7 TO 100
SAVE DISPLACEMENT 10
13.4.5 Merging of Transient Files

SEARCH DATA i
SEARCH TRANSIENT i
or
ASSIGN 19 TRANi.TIT BINARY
MERGE TRANSIENT j RESEQUENCE
SAVE DATA TRANSIENT k
The output transient file k is constituted by chaining the input transient files (i and j).
The RESEQUENCE command is used to renumber the cards of the second transient after the
first transient card.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
13.5 CROSS SECTIONS

13.5.1 Introduction
The routine CROSS SECTION may be used to calculate, from the results of an analysis, results
at uniformly spaced points on a plane or straight line intersecting the structure, or at nodes of the
mesh. For shell elements, results are given at center or at integration points of selected elements
for three points across thickness (mid-shell surface, inner and upper skins).
The results are given in the axes of the section.
Each cross section generates one set of results on the postprocessing file.
13.5.2 Files
Input files: DATA, RESULTS
Output file: POSTPROCESSING
Notes:
l The use of this routine to calculate stress or strain at nodes must be preceded by execution of the
routine AVERAGE.
l The routine AVERAGE for stress does not apply to shell elements.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
13.5.3 Method of Calculation

The structure is intersected by a plane or a straight line, and points at the nodes of a uniform
grid or at regular intervals on the straight line are considered.
For each point of the grid or line, the routine determines the element to which it belongs and its
position in the element.
It is then possible, given the shape functions used to interpolate the solution over each element,
to compute the displacement, stress and strain at every point of the grid or line from nodal
values for the elements.
Notes:
l Clearly for points of the grid or line which coincide with nodes of the structure, there is no
interpolation of results and only a transform of axes according to the orientation of the cross
section is required.
l For shell elements, cross-sections are currently defined from a list of mesh elements.
13.5.4 Problem Size Limits

Maximum number of elements = 2 000 000
Maximum number of points in one direction = 100
Number of X Number of X
cross sections components

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
13.5.5 Input data

CROSS SECTION (LINEARIZE) (SHELL) (Label) (EXTRACT) (SIZE s)
AXES (R)
ELEMENTS (m1, m2...) or (DIMENSION n)
EDGE
HEADER
ex
ez
LINE nx (XI = xi XE = xe)
Title
GRID nx ny
Title
NODES n1, n2... TO nx
Title
RETURN
Note:
l Each command GRID, LINE or NODES generates one set of results for postprocessing, to which is
assigned the title following the command.
Description
a) CROSS SECTION opens the postprocessing file
SHELL Label for the cross section of shell elements (see Remarks).
EXTRACT Request extraction of relevant data (see Remarks).
LINEARIZE Linearization of the relevant results (see Remarks)
Labels
l DISPLACEMENT
l STRESS Type of result to be processed.
l STRAIN
l PRINCIPAL
INTENSITY
Operation to be carried out on stress or strain (optional).
l TRESCA
l MISES

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
THERMAL The temperature stored after the stresses is taken into account. In the lack
of THERMAL label, the file contains only the stresses.
Result may be processed per cross section, but several different operations
may be carried out.
SIZE s Defines the default POST processing file size (see Chapter 13.6.3).
SPATIAL this label is used to save a cross section with 3 coordinates points.
b) AXES
There are six different ways of defining the axes of the cross section.
For each of :
(R) = (Axes)
NODES (X)
POINTS (X)
There are two possible modes of definition.
Axes
Local axes of the cross section are defined by :
l 3 angles of rotation,
l 3 coordinates (origin of local axes).
The form of the command is
AXES (U) A1 = a1 A2 = a2 A3 = a3 XX = xo YY = yo ZZ = zo
where U specifies the unit of angular measure :

(U) = DEGREES (the default option)
GRADES
RADIANS
TANGENT (angles defined by their tangents).
1) Rotation defined with respect to the global axes:
AXES (U) PSI Ψ THETA = θ PHI = φ XX = xo YY = yo ZZ = zo
where Ψ , θ and φ are angles defining the rotations required to pass from the general axes to the
new axes.
The values xo, yo and zo are the global coordinates of the origin of the local axes of the cross
section.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
2) Rotation defined with respect to the last local axes defined:
AXES (U) ALPHA α BETA = β GAMMA = γ XX = xo YY = yo ZZ = zo

where
α = rotation about the x axis of the last local system defined,
β = rotation about the y axis of the last local system defined,
γ = rotation about the z axis of the last local system defined.
NODES Command
The local axes are defined by three nodes of the mesh :
NODE (X) n1, n2 n3
POINTS Command
The local axes are defined by three points specified by the user:
POINT (X) x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3
where xi yi zi are the coordinates of the point ni.

If the label X is included in the command AXES NODES or AXES POINTS, the local axes
are defined as follows:
l x axis in the direction n1 to n2
l y axis in the plane passing through n1, n2 and n3
otherwise,
l the z axis is perpendicular to the plane passing through n1, n2 and n3
l the x axis is parallel with the plane defined by the global x and y axes
l the axes (x,y) are oriented in the same direction as the vectors
The origin of local axes is taken to be at n1.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
l by default, the global axes are retained

l each definition of the local axes remains in force until the next AXES command is read.
c) ELEMENTS
May be used to specify a subset of elements for which results are to be computed. If this
command is omitted, all elements of dimension 2 or 3, depending upon the type of structure, are
taken into account (1 in THERMAL option).
This command is substitutive.
d) EDGE Command
In conjunction with the command GRID generates results for a contour which is either the
boundary of a two dimensional domain, or the intersection of the plane of the cross section and
the surface of a three dimensional structure.
This command generates a set of results on the postprocessing file.
e) HEADER Command
Is followed by as many lines of data as there are components of results and of transformations.
Results headers precede transformation headers, in the order PRINCIPAL, INTENSITY,
TRESCA and MISES.
The various results are stored in the order DISPLACEMENT, STRESS, STRAIN.
Input data is as follows.
HEADER
header 1)
header 2) Only the first 4 characters of each header are taken into account.
header n)
f) LINE Command : The structure is crossed by the local ox axis
In this command, nx is the number of points on the line (1 < nx ≤ 100, by default nx=2).
The optional labels XI and XE are used to impose the segment of the cross section (by default
xi=0, xe =0).
If the optional labels are absent, the segment of the cross section is automatically determinate, xi
and xe are corresponding to the very local abscissas of the nodes of the elements intersected by
the line of the cross section.
The command LINE initiates the calculation and generates a set of results in the postprocessing
file.
g) GRID Command : the structure is crossed by the local xOy plane
In this command, nx and ny are the numbers of points in the x and y directions of the grid
(0 < nx ≤ 100 and 0 < ny ≤ 100).
By default, nx and ny are taken to be zero. This command initiates the calculation of a grid, and
generates a set of results on the postprocessing file.
h) NODES

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
n1 n2... are the numbers of nodes for which results are to be recalculated.
This command generates a set of results on the postprocessing file.
i) RETURN
When this command is read, the postprocessing file is closed.
Remarks
If the label EXTRACT appears in the command CROSS SECTION, then the following data is
printed.
l the dimension of elements selected.
l the transformation matrix associated with the local axes.
l the numbers of elements intersected by the plane of the cross section.
l the minimum and maximum coordinates of the points of the cross section.
l the number of points and the distance or distances between points of the cross section.
If the label LINEARIZE is used with the command CROSS SECTION, computation of
linearized values is performed.
The linearization of data (displacements, stresses, strains, temperatures) on the cross section
involves the decrease of data number to five characteristic values:
l 1: true value on inner surface
l 2: linearized value on inner surface = mean value +/- bending value
l 3: mean value on the thickness center
l 4: linearized value on outer surface = mean value -/+ bending value
l 5: true value on outer surface
Labels TRESCA and MISES can be used with the label LINEARIZE STRESS. Tresca and
Mises criteria are then computed with the five values of linearized stresses. Storage order is as
follow: linearized stress components – (linearized temperature) – (Tresca criterion) – (Mises
criterion).
Be careful, the use of PRINCIPAL and INTENSITY labels is not compatible with the
LINEARIZE label.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
The routine CROSS SECTION refers to the local nodal displacement, stress and strain files for
nodal values.
If it is desired to obtain cross sections for linear combinations of load cases, then it is necessary
first to use the routine COMBINE STORE.
The label SHELL with the command CROSS SECTION is necessary for structures with shell
elements. The CROSS SECTION SHELL command is only applicable to elements 2003,
2004, 2006 and 2008.
Unlike cross-sections in solids, cross-sections in shell elements are not currently defined from
intersecting meshed volume, but from a list of mesh elements. The ELEMENTS subcommand
is used to define the number of elements subjected to cross section generation.
For linear elements (2003 and 2004) stresses are given at the center of the mesh. So each
selected element generates one cross-section. For quadratic elements (2006 and 2008) values
are calculated at their integration points. So each selected element generates as many cross-
sections as its integration points.
Results are obtained in five points of the thickness:
l 1, 2: true value on inner surface
l 3: mean value on the thickness center
l 4, 5: true value on outer surface
EDGE, HEADER, LINE, GRID and NODES commands are not available with the SHELL
label.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.5 Cross Sections
13.5.6 Example
SEARCH DATA STRESS NODES 2
CROSS SECTION STRESS PRINCIPAL EXTRACT
ELEMENTS DIMENSION 2
HEADER
SIGx
SIGy
Txy
SIGz
PSI
S1
S2
S3
AXES NODES 7 10
LINE 20
CROSS SECTION AUTOMATIC
LINE 20 (XI = 0) XE = 149.9
CROSS SECTION IMPOSE
RETURN
SAVE POSTPROCESSING 2

CROSS SECTION SHELL
ELEMENTS 1 10 20
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
13.6 Postprocessing Module
13.6 POSTPROCESSING MODULE

13.6.1 Introduction
The command POSTPROCESSING calls a general routine for postprocessing of results of an
analysis, and creates a POSTPROCESSING file the contents of which may be post-processed.
The principle of operation of this routine is that a subset of nodes, elements or materials is
selected, for which certain components of results are to be analyzed or transformed.
These transformations may be carried out on load cases or for combinations of load cases.
Input data is therefore required to define:
l the choice of nodes or elements ;
l the selection of components of results and of transformations to be carried out ;
l linear combinations of load cases.
A coherent set defined by these three specifications is referred to as a set of results. Each set of
results produced by the postprocessing routine is written to the file POSTPROCESSING.
It is possible subsequently to refer individually to each set of results on the file.
Note:
l Results may not be extrapolated.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.6.2 Files
The routine POSTPROCESSING uses local DATA and RESULTS files and creates a file
named POSTPROCESSING the contents of which may be post-processed.
Note:
l As DATA file has been modified by the routine POSTPROCESSING, it is necessary to recover the
previous DATA file before using any command applied to the initial geometry.
It is therefore possible to transform the following results:

DISPLACEMENTS
REACTIONS
at nodes
STRESSES
STRAINS
FORCES at the centers of elements.

In the case of one-dimension elements, the forces on the second node have their sign modified
in order to draw a graph as a function of the curved abscissa, later.
For a description of the structure of the file POSTPROCESSING, see table 13.4.
Note:
l Before using this routine to transform stresses or strains, it is first necessary to execute the
routine AVERAGE.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.6.3 Problem Size Limits

Problem size limits for this routine are as follows:
l maximum number of sets of results 19
l maximum number of components of results per set of results 20
l maximum number of results written to file per set of results 28
l maximum number of selected nodes 600
l maximum number of selected elements 600
(other than beam elements)

l maximum number of selected beam elements 300
The POST PROCESSING file size can be approximated by:
Size = 260 + [ (NCi+1) *NPi + ( 10+NPi*NRi) *NCOMBi ]

With
NCH = number of sets of results
NCi = number of coordinates par node
NPi = number of selected points
NRi = number of components of results
NCOMBi = number of combinations.
By default the file size created by POST PROCESSING and CROSS-SECTION is
100 000 words. The program will stop if the size needed is larger than the initial size.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.6.4 Input Data

The various transformations implemented in POSTPROCESSING are summarized in Table
13.6.2. Input data is of the following form.
Description
POSTPROCESSING opens the postprocessing file.
SIZE s defines the POST PROCESSING file size.
SET n specifies the creation of a set of results where n is the number (integer)
by which the set of results is identified
title is the title of the set of results (to be printed).
The data following this command until either the next command SET or the command
RETURN, constitutes the definition of the set of results.
(RESULTS) is the type of results to be processed, chosen from the list.
l DISPLACEMENT
l REACTION
l FORCE
l STRESS
l STRAIN
followed by component numbers :

i, j, k are component numbers, as defined for the type of structure under
consideration. (Used only for printing).
Zeroes may be included in this list, these being taken to specify fictitious zero value
components, to ensure uniform layout of printed results.

© 2019 ESI Group
(GEOMETRY) specifies which part of the structure is to be taken into account, and is of the
form
l ELEMENTS m
l NODES n
l MATERIALS l
The results selected in this way may be transformed by an operation requested in the preceding
commands.
a) List of labels
Each label must be followed by the input component numbers (i, j, k...) in the order given
hereafter (see Table 13.5).
PRINCIPAL Requests the calculation of principal forces from the components Nx,
NXY and NY of the tensor
Computed results are the angle Ψ made by the first principal force with
the x-axis, and the two principal forces N1 and N2 (this also applies to
the moments MX, MXY and MY).
MULTIPLY Specifies the multiplication of the result vector by a matrix. The first
number following this label is taken to be the number of the matrix (see
command MATRIX). The number of components of results taken into
account in this operation is therefore equal to the number of columns of
the matrix.
THREE Requests the calculation of the three principal stresses from the
DIMENSIONAL components σx, σy, σz, τxy,τxz and τyz of the tensor :
Computed results are the principal stresses σ1, σ2 and σ3, and also the
angles Ψ, θ, and φdefining the principal directions.
TUBE Requests the calculation of stresses in tubes from Nx, My and Mz. The
following results are computed:
σ1 = Nx/S
σ2 = Vy / Iy
σ3 = σ1 + σ2
σ4 = σ1 - σ2
MISE Requests the calculation of the von Mises equivalent unidirectional
stress for two-dimensional structures, from the components σx, σy, τxy,
and σz.

© 2019 ESI Group
VMISE Requests the calculation of the von Mises equivalent unidirectional stress
for three dimensional solid elements, from the components σx, σy, σz, τxy,
τxz and τyz.
INTRI Requests the calculation of stress invariants for three dimensional solid
elements, from the six components σx, σy, σz, τxy, τxz and τyz. Computed
results are three invariants and maximum shear stress (Tresca criterion).
INPLA Requests the calculation of force invariant for two dimensional elements,
from the following components.
Two-dimensional structure: σx,τxy, σy.
Plate structure: Mx, Mxy, My.
Computed results are three invariants and maximum shear stress (Tresca
criterion).
INREV Requests the calculation of stress invariants for solid axisymmetric
elements, from the components σx,τxy, σy and σz. Computed results
are three invariants and maximum shear stress (Tresca criterion).
THIN SHELL Requests the calculation of components of stress, principal stresses,
maximum shear stress (Tresca criterion) and von Mises equivalent
unidirectional stress for the upper, middle and lower surfaces, from Nx,
Nxy, Ny, Mx, Mxy and My. 24 results are computed, these being σx,
τxy, σy, an angle Ψ, the principal stresses σ1, and σ2, maximum shear
stress and von Mises equivalent uniaxial stress for each of the three
surfaces.
AXISYMMETRIC Requests the calculation of components of stress, maximum shear stress
(Tresca criterion) and von Mises equivalent unidirectional stress for the
upper, middle and lower surfaces of axisymmetric shells, from Nx, Nz,
Mx and Mz.
12 results are computed, these being σx, σz, maximum shear stress and
von Mises equivalent unidirectional stress for each of the three surfaces.

© 2019 ESI Group
BEAM Requests the calculation of stresses in beam elements.

l structure type plane: frame
The two extreme fiber stresses SIGMAY+ and SIGMAY- are
computed from Nx and Mz. Note that the extreme fibber distances from
the neutral axis in bending (VZ and VPZ) in the positive and negative y
directions must be specified in the input data of the problem.
l structure type: grid
The two extreme fiber stresses SIGMAZ+ and SIGMAZ- are computed
from My. Note that the extreme fiber distances from the neutral axis
(VY and VPY) in the positive and negative z directions must be
specified in the input data of the problem.
l structure type: three dimensional frame
The four extreme fiber stresses SIGMAY+, SIGMAY-, SIGMAZ+ and
SIGMAZ- are computed from the components Nx, My and Mz. Note
that the extreme fiber distances from the neutral axes in bending (VY,
VPY, VZ and VPZ) in the positive and negative y and z directions must
be specified in the input data of the problem.
l structure types: three dimensional pin-jointed frame and plane pin-
jointed frame
The axial stress αx is computed from Nx.
TRANSF Specifies a transformation programmed by the user (see level 2
command TRANSF).
FORCE Request the calculation of the following values (in upper, middle and
COMPOSITE 1 2 lower surface of the element) :
3 4 5 6 / LAYER 1 l stresses in laminated composite axes.
(HILL phi) or
l PSI angle and principal stresses.
(TSAI pti)
l HILL or TSAI criterion.
l Stresses in element axes (except for upper surface). (for HILL or TSAI
parameters see 13.13 SHELL Procedure).
Notes:
l If there is no label associated with a group of components, those components are not transformed.
l There may be several labels in a single command, and any label may appear several times.
b) The command ELEMENTS
This command is of the form
ELEMENTS m
and is used to select elements.

© 2019 ESI Group
The command FORCE must always be followed by the command ELEMENTS.

The parameter m is a list of selected elements. If m is omitted, all elements of the mesh are taken
into consideration.
Alternatively, elements may be selected by means of the label DIMENSION followed by a
number:
l ELEMENT DIMENSION 1 selects elements with 2 nodes. For axisymmetric thin shells,
the label SHELL must be added.

l ELEMENT DIMENSION 2 selects two dimensional elements.
l ELEMENT DIMENSION 3 selects solid three dimensional elements.
l ELEMENT DIMENSION 4 selects point elements (elements of zero dimension).
Note:
l All selected elements must be of the same dimension.
c) The command NODES
The command is of the form
NODES n
and is used to select nodes.

The commands DISPLACEMENT, REACTION, STRESS and STRAIN must always be
followed by the command NODES.
The parameters of this command are the same as those of the command ELEMENT, except that
the label DIMENSION has no meaning and so cannot be used.
d) The command MATERIALS
MATERIALS l
and is used to select materials.

l = list of selected material numbers (mandatory)
If the previous command is FORCE, the analysis applies to ELEMENTS and the restrictions
are the same as for the ELEMENTS command.
If the previous command is DISPLACEMENT, REACTION, STRESS or STRAIN the
analysis applies to NODES.

© 2019 ESI Group
e) The command AXES

AXES (R)
where (R) =
- GENERAL
- LOCAL
- ANY PSI, THETA, PHI (angles of rotation)
- RADIAL xo yo (origin of polar coordinates)
- SPHERICAL xo yo zo (origin of spherical polar coordinates).
This command enables the axes with respect to which results are given to be changed.
The command AXES must precede the command COMBINE.
Note:
l This command can be used only for DISPLACEMENT and REACTION results.
f) The command HEADERS
HEADERS
ci
The command HEADERS may be used to assign to each column of printed results a header, it
is followed by one line of input data per header, the first four non-blank characters of each of
which constitute the headers.
There are as many such lines of input data as there are components of results and
transformations.
g) The command MATRIX
MATRIX m ROW l COLUMN c (LABEL)

(i, j) = Xij...
and defines a matrix identified by the number m.

l = number of rows
c = number of columns
(LABEL) = SYMMETRIC if the matrix is symmetric.
The command is followed by sets of three values, which define the matrix coefficients:

© 2019 ESI Group
i = row number
j = column number
Xij = value of the coefficient (i, j) of the matrix.
Unspecified terms are taken to be zero.
Notes:
l A matrix may not consist of more than 36 coefficients.
l Up to 12 matrices may be defined at any one time.
l If the matrix m has previously been defined, the new definition replaces the old.
h) The command TRANSF
TRANSF m, n (LIST)
SUBROUTINE
...
END
and enables the user to specify a non-standard transformation.

Such a transformation is defined by a subroutine written in simplified Fortran (see Chapter 4,
command TABLE) which is interpreted by SYSTUS.
The command TRANSF must precede the command COMBINE.
The subroutine is placed after the command TRANSF, and is terminated by the statement
END. There must be 4 formal parameters.
In the command TRANSF,
m is the number of components upon which the routine operates.
n is the number of results produced by the transformation.
LIST requests a listing of the routine.
Specification of subroutine: (the name is arbitrary)

© 2019 ESI Group
SUBROUTINE FLUX (X, Y, COOR, CMAT)

X is the group of selected components for a given point and combination,
upon which the routine operates (dimension m)
Y Are the results produced by the transformation (dimension n)
COOR Is a subscripted variable of dimension 3 which holds the coordinates of
the point
CMAT Holds material properties
COOR and must be declared but are not necessarily used.
CMAT
i) The command COMBINE
COMBINE
Title / (Ci, ni), (Cj, nj)
LOAD i
A linear combination may be defined in either of two ways:

l by a group of data consisting of a title zone, a slash (/), and pairs of values (Ci, ni) where Ci
is the factor by which load case ni is multiplied.

l by the command LOAD followed by the number of the load case under consideration.
j) The command RETURN

This command closes the file POSTPROCESSING and terminates execution of the routine.
RETURN
The commands FORCE, DISPLACEMENT, REACTION, STRESS, STRAIN, NODES,

ELEMENTS and MATRIX are carried forward from one set of results to the next until such
time as they are superseded.
The points belonging to a set of results must all be of the same type.
A single set of results may not include both nodes and elements. Where a set of results relates to
elements, these must all be of the same dimension ; otherwise, the dimension is taken to be that
of the first element selected, and all elements with a different dimension are discarded.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.6.5 Example
SEARCH DATA RESULT 2
POSTPROCESSING
SET 1
FORCE 1 2 3 4 PRINCIPAL 1 3 2 INREV 1 3 2 4
ELEMENT DIMENSION 2
HEADER
SIGx
SIGy
Txy
SIGz
PSI
SIG1
SIG2
S1-2
S2-3
S3-1
TRES
COMBINE
CASE 1 / 1 2
CASE 2 / 1 3
CASE 3 / 1 4
CASE 4 / 1 5
CASE 5 / 1 6
CASE 6 / 1 7
CASE 3-1 / 1 4 -1 2
CASE 4-1 / 1 5 -1 2
CASE 6-4 / 1 7 -1 5
RETURN
SAVE POSTPROCESSING 1
Structure POSTPROCESSING file

The file is divided into sets of results.
Each set of results consists of points (for the routine POSTPROCESSING, these are either
nodes or elements).
For each combination of each set of results, there is a record of NR components of results for
the NP postprocessing points chosen.

© 2019 ESI Group
STRUCTURE OF POSTPROCESSING FILE
NC = number of coordinates.
NR = number of components of results.
NP = number of points.
Table 13.4

© 2019 ESI Group
Transformations effected by the routine POSTPROCESSING

© 2019 ESI Group
Table 13.5

© 2019 ESI Group
13.7 Printing of Results
13.7 PRINTING OF RESULTS

13.7.1 The PRINT Command
a) Introduction
This command is used to print out the contents of a POSTPROCESSING file created by the
cross-section and postprocessing routines.
b) Input data
PRINT (POINT)
LIMIT LOWER or UPPER i Si
SET n COMBINE ci COMPONENTS i j k
SET n COMBINE ci
SET n COORDINATES
SET n
RETURN
1. PRINT Command
This command requests printing of the POSTPROCESSING file for a set of results and a
combination.
SET n (labels) Specifies which set of results is to be printed ; n is the number of the set
and the (labels) may be as follows.
COMBINE ci Selects for printing the combination ci, where the number ci is the
position of the combination within set n.
COMPONENTS i j k Selects for printing the components i, j, k, of the results.
COORDINATES Requests printing of the coordinates of the points of the set of results.
Notes:
l There is no limit on the number of SET subcommands. If the COMPONENTS label is omitted, then
all components of results are printed out.
l If the label COMBINE is omitted, then all combinations and components of the set of results are
printed, together with the coordinates of the points of the set. If the points are elements, then the
coordinates printed are those of the centroids.
l If only the coordinates of points are to be printed then just the label COORDINATES should be
included in the command.
l Each time results are printed, the routine also prints the maximum and minimum values of each
component and the points at which these values are attained.
LIMIT (label) Requests the printing, next to values of results which lie outside
specified limits, of a character indicating that the value is above the
upper limit or below the lower limit.

© 2019 ESI Group
The command LIMIT must appear before the command SET for which the limits are to be
operative.
(label) is UPPER or LOWER, and Si is the limit to apply for the component i. The following
characters may be printed :
P if the upper limit is exceeded
M if the value is below the lower limit
2. PRINT POINT Command
This command enables the contents of a POSTPROCESSING file to be printed point by point.
For each point in turn of a given set of results, selected components are printed for all
combinations. The command PRINT POINT is followed by one or more SET commands, each
of the form
SET n COMPONENTS i j k
where :
n Is the number of the set of results on the postprocessing file.
ijk Are the positions in the postprocessing file of the components of
results to be printed.
If the label COMPONENTS is omitted, all components are printed.
c) Example
SEARCH POSTPROCESSING 1
PRINT
SET 1 COMBINE 4
SET 2
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
13.7.2 The Command PRINT TRANSIENT or MODE

a) Introduction
This module can be used to print all the components stored in a transient or a mode file.
For elements, the components are those stored in the FORCE file.
For nodes, the components are those stored in the DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY,
ACCELERATION, REACTION or STRESS file for a transient file ; DISPLACEMENT,
ACCELERATION, REACTION, FORCE for a mode file.
b) Input data
PRINT TRANSIENT or MODE starts the treatment.

GEOMETRY Selection specifies which part of the structure is to taken into account,
and is of the form (this label is mandatory) :
ELEMENTS m1 m2 ...
or NODES n1 n2 ...
or NODES LINE n1 n2 (selection of nodes on line connecting nodes
n1 and n2)
or MEDIUM me1 me2 ...
LABEL The label for postprocessing of the element FORCE file is
COMPONENT.
For postprocessing of the nodes, the label corresponds to the type of
file to be postprocessed : DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY,
ACCELERATION, STRESS, STRAIN, or PRESSURE.
For a medium, the corresponding label is VALUE.
PRECISION is used to print the result to 7 significant digits. SUM is
used to sum the selected results.
CARD Gives the list of the cards to be treated, and starts the printing.
LAST Indicates that the last stored card is taken without specifying its number.
In this case, the label LAST must follow the label CARD in place of
the number n.
MODE Gives the list of the modes to be treated, and starts the printing.

© 2019 ESI Group
Notes:
l the number of cards is limited to 100.
l the number of selected elements is limited to 100.
l the number of selected nodes is limited to 100.
l the number of components is limited to 100.
c) Examples
- PRINT TRANSIENT

PRINT TRANSIENT
NODES 10 TO 15
DISPLACEMENT 1 2
CARD 1 TO 5
RETURN
- PRINT VECTOR
SEARCH DATA MODES 5

PRINT MODE
ELEMENTS 101 TO 110 ; thick shells
COMPONENTS 1 TO 8
MODES 1 3 7
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
13.7.3 Command PRINT CONSTRAINTS

a) Introduction
This procedure is used to calculate the forces and pressures of elastic constraints.
SYSTUS can integrate elastic constraints, whether concentrated on the nodes, or distributed
uniformly or not (e.g. thermal exchange factors variable in space) on the elements. For a
problem of this type, the user defines constraint factor Kc (stiffness concentrated on a node) or
K (stiffness distributed over an element), and Uo, displacement of the end of the constraint
(spring end) over all nodes and/or elements concerned, in the input data. Finite element
computation proper gives structure displacements U at the points of constraint, in particular.
The resultant force on a node is written:
Fc = Kc (Uo -U)
and the resultant pressure on an element is written:
P = K (Uo -U)
In the above expressions, Kc (or K) can depend on displacement U (non-linear analysis), the
coordinates of the point concerned, or time (transient analysis). Likewise Uo can depend on the
coordinates of the point or time.
The constraint (Kc or K and Uo) can be defined in a special system of axes. In this case,
SYSTUS gives the result in the general axes.
b) Files
Input files are:
l DATA file containing problem data,
l RESULT file containing the results of linear static analysis,
l or a TRANSIENT file containing the results of non-linear transient analysis.
c) Input data
LOAD indicates loads to be analyzed (following linear static analysis). By

default of list, all loads are analyzed.
CARDS Indicates the cards of a transient file to be analyzed. By default of list,
all cards are analyzed.

© 2019 ESI Group
Notes:
l The procedure can only be run following:
l static linear analysis (command SOLVE or CALCULATE), involving a number of load cases
where appropriate,
l or static or dynamic non-linear analysis (command TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR).
l and is used with all computation options.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.8 The Command REARRANGE
13.8 THE COMMAND REARRANGE

a) Introduction
The routine REARRANGE may be used to change the number and order of components in the
results files (displacements, reactions, forces, nodal stresses and strains).
b) Files
Input files = DATA and the RESULTS file to be modified.
Output file = the modified RESULTS file.
c) Input Data
REARRANGE (label) s C1 C2... Cs
Description
(label) = specifies the type of results to be modified, chosen from
l DISPLACEMENT
l REACTION
l FORCE
l STRESS
l STRAIN
s is the number of components to be written to the output file, and C1, C2... Cs are the
component numbers in the order in which they are to be arranged on that file.
If Ci = 0, then the value zero is written in position i on the output file.
If Ci < 0, then component number changes sign before being written to the output file.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.9 The Command FORCE
13.9 THE COMMAND FORCE

a) Introduction
The routine FORCE may be used to compute for some or all of the elements of the mesh :
l the elastic equivalent nodal forces of the elements (F = KU), these being the external forces
acting on elements. If local axes have been associated with a node by means of the command
CONSTRAINT, then components of force in the directions of these axes are computed.
l the elastic strain energy of each element E = 1/2 Ut KU (available in linear elasticity without
thermal load and without initial strain load in element).

b) Files
Input files :
l DATA on which is specified the number of load cases to be analyzed.
l RESULTS which may be either results of a static problem, or eigenvectors.
l STIFFNESS only the basic stiffness matrices are used.
l MASS if the label MASS is present.
c) Results
If no labels are included in the command FORCE, equivalent nodal forces and strain energy are
printed for each element, for every load case.
This can result in large quantities of printout data.
If the label ENERGY is present, the energy in the selected elements is computed but not stored.
If the label ALL is present, then both of the above types of result are printed.
d) Input data
FORCE (ENERGY) (ALL) (MASS) (ABSOLUTE)

list of elements
RETURN
where :
ENERGY Computes the percentages of energy if the label ABSOLUTE is absent.
Computes the energy if the label ABSOLUTE is present.
ALL Computes the equivalent nodal forces and energies. The internal forces
calculated are used to determine the strain energies.
MASS Requests that forces and energies be calculated from the mass matrices
of elements, to yield the results :
F = MU proportional to inertial forces
E = 1/2 UtMU proportional to kinetic energy
Forces and energies associated with other matrices (DAMPING, BUCKLING) may be
computed by means of the following sequence of commands.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.9 The Command FORCE
ASSIGN 13 name of file BINARY

FORCE...
...
RETURN
where name of file = permanent file name on the computer being used.
The list of elements, which may for example be of the form :
ELEMENTS i Defines the set of elements for which the analysis is to be carried out.
TO j STEP k In the absence of a list of elements, the entire structure is considered.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.10 The Command STRESS
13.10 THE COMMAND STRESS

a) Introduction
The command STRESS may be used to calculate stresses in shell and beam elements, from data
on the file FORCE.
b) Files
Input files = DATA, FORCE.
Output files = DATA, FORCE.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.10.1 General Case

FORCES file of a RESULT file
1) Input data
STRESS
2) Results
For beam elements, the sum of axial and bending stress is calculated at 2 or 4 points at the
extremities of the y and z axes, as shown in the following sketch.
For shells, stresses are calculated on the upper, middle and lower surfaces.
The routine replaces the old FORCE file by a new file with a different number of stresses per
element (LCODE (23)).
Notes:
l This routine does not print the results. For this purpose, the command COMBINE FORCE should
be used.
l This routine cannot be applied to the analysis of structure types THERMAL, TWO-
DIMENSIONAL, THREE-DIMENSIONAL or THREE-DIMENSIONAL HARMONIC, nor may it
be used to compute stresses in elements of type x9xx.
l For thick shell element, if the FORCES file contains the 8 generalised forces, the shear on
average skin is as follows:

© 2019 ESI Group
3) Transformations obtained with the routine STRESS
(1) At each end of the beam element

(2) On the upper, middle and lower surfaces:
EPS = 1, 0, -1 respectively
(3) See chapter 8 for notation.
FORCES File of a Temporal TRANSIENT File

Input data
SEARCH DATA TRANSIENT i

STRESS TRANSIENT
SAVE DATA TRANSIENT j
The FORCE file of TRANSIENT I must contain the generalized forces of beams and shells.
TRANSIENT j contains one FORCE file including the stresses computed by beams and shells.

© 2019 ESI Group
Transformations executed by the TRANSIENT STRESS routine
(1) At each end of the beam element

(2) On the upper, middle and lower surfaces:
EPS = 1, 0, -1 respectively
(3) See chapter 8 for notation.
Note:
l The TRANSIENT STRESS routine does not change the component number of the initial FORCE
file.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.10.2 Stresses in Laminated Shells

In the case of a laminated composite shell, the STRESS command calculates stresses in each
layer.
STRESS LAYER (i) (EXTRACT) (STRAIN)
LAYER (i) Stresses are calculated on the upper, middle and lower surfaces with
respect to the local axes and stored in the FORCE file. If i is omitted,
the stresses are calculated in all layers.
EXTRACT Specifies that a detailed output of stresses on the middle surface with
respect to the laminated axes and element axes must be generated.
There is no printout if this label is not supplied.
STRAIN Specifies that printout of strains and curvatures on the middle surface
must be generated.
EXTRACT and STRAIN cannot coexist.
Notes:
l For a non-laminated shell, the calculation will be wrong if the LAYER label exists.
l For a laminated shell, calculation will be wrong if the selected layer number (i) does not exist.
l For a laminated shell, the calculation will be wrong if the LAYER label does not exist. Indeed,
results will be computed with linearized values of forces and moments across the shell thickness.
l If there is no number after the LAYER label then it will not be possible, with the command
COMBINE FORCE, to print the forces of the layers other than the first. It is better to use the label
LAYER i (or else to print the forces with the EXTRACT label on the LAYER command).

© 2019 ESI Group
13.10.3 Stresses in Beams using Section Database

In option BEAM SPATIAL, if the properties of sections of beams are defined by SECTION
commands (Chapter 20) the calculation of axial and shear stresses at predefined points of the
section is possible. These stresses are computed in the following manner:
(axial)
(shear)
with
l NX, TY, TZ, MX, MY, MZ values at end node forces (file FORCES)
l bijcoefficients defining the stress at point i in the section relative to force j (The B matrix is
read in the section database or computed if section is a PIPE, PLATE or RECTANGLE)

Notes
l The maximum number of points per section is 8. Their number and location depends on the type of
section.
l An equivalent stress criterion is also computed
MISES =
TRESCA =
Files
Input files :
l DATA
l FORCES (containing end forces and moments: 12 components per element)
Output files :
l DATA (this file is modified and cannot be used for any future computation)
l FORCES (2 stresses per point in the section and 8 points maximum per section, 2 nodes per
element).
Input Data
STRESS SECTION (TRESCA)

UNITS ... MAXI ... *
SECTION .... *
...
USER n *
LOAD i TO j STEP k
SELECT ELEMENTS (list )
( DIMENSION d)
( SHAPE f )
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
*see. Chapter 20
STRESS SECTION
The criterion computed by default is MISES. If TRESCA label is present, the TRESCA
criterion is computed.
UNITS, SECTION ... USER
These commands partially defined in the chapter 20 must be introduced after the STRESS
SECTION command.
LOAD
This command (mandatory) selects the load cases for which stresses are computed. The
maximum load case number must be lower than or equal to 32.
SELECT ELEMENTS
The elements where stresses are printed are selected with this command.
By default stresses are printed for all elements. In every case, stresses are computed and stored
on FORCE file for each element.
Example
SEARCH DATA RESULTS 10

STRESSES SECTION
UNIT 100. MAXI 55
SECTION 51 TYPE IPE100
SECTION 1 TYPE HEA100
SECTION 2 TYPE IPET100
SECTION 3 TYPE L100*100*6
SECTION 50 TYPE IPEA100
SECTION 4 PLATE .100 .006
SECTION 5 PIPE .100 .006
SECTION 6 RECTANGLE .100 .006 .100 .006
LOADS 1 TO 3
RETURN
SAVE DATA FORCES 11

© 2019 ESI Group
Location of Stress Points in each Type of Section
7 stress points for I

Dimensions
l b : flanges width
l h : web height
l e : flange thickness (or thickness at quarter flange for IPN sections)
l a : web thickness
l r : fillet radius web-flange
Points locations
l point 1 - left end of the upper face of the upper flange
l point 2 - right end of the upper face of the upper flange
l point 3 - left end of the lower face of the lower flange
l point 4 - right end of the lower face of the lower flange
l point 5 - middle point of the web at the distance (e+r) of the upper face of the upper flange
l point 6 - middle point of the web at half height
l point 7 - middle point of the web at the distance (e+r) of the lower face of the lower flange
5 stress points for T

Dimensions
l b : flanges width
l h : double of the web height
l e : flange thickness
l a : web thickness

© 2019 ESI Group
Points locations
l point 3 - middle point of the web at the distance (e+r) of the upper face of the upper flange
l point 4 - middle point of the web on the neutral fiber
l point 5 - middle point of the web at the lower end
7 stress points for L

Dimensions
l a : length of the largest flange
l b : length of the smallest flange
l e : thickness of the two flanges
l r : fillet radius between the two flanges
l r1 : fillet radius at the end of the flanges
l du : distance between the Z axis of inertia (local axis) and the intersection of the exterior faces
of the two flanges
l dv : distance between the Y axis of inertia (local axis) and the intersection of the exterior
faces of the two flanges
Points locations
l point 1 - exterior face of the smallest flange at the end
l point 2 - intersection of the exterior faces of the two flanges
l point 3 - exterior face of the largest flange at the end
l point 4 - exterior face of the smallest flange at the distance (du) of the point 2
l point 5 - exterior face of the smallest flange at the distance (e+r) of the point 2
l point 6 - exterior face of the largest flange at the distance (e+r) of the point 2
l point 7 - exterior face of the largest flange at the distance (dv) of the point 2.

© 2019 ESI Group
7 stress points for U

© 2019 ESI Group
Dimensions
l b : flanges width
l h : double of the web height
l e : flange thickness (or thickness at quarter flange for UPN sections)
l a : web thickness
Points locations
l point 1 - left end of the lower face of the lower flange
l point 2 - right end of the lower face of the lower flange
l point 5 - located on the lower flange at the distance a of point 1
l point 6 - located on the upper flange at the distance a of point 3
l point 7 - middle point of the web at half height on the exterior face
5 stress points for plates (PLATE)
4 Stresses points for pipes with thin wall (PIPE)

© 2019 ESI Group
8 stresses points for rectangles with thin wall (RECTANGLE)

© 2019 ESI Group
13.11 The command SPLIT
13.11 THE COMMAND SPLIT

a) Introduction
In thermoelastic analysis with substructuring, the command SPLIT may be used to assign
separately to each superelement (zero level substructure) node of a substructure the temperatures
determined previously by thermal analysis of the assembled structure.
b) Files
Input files
l DATA (ne) for the substructure before assembly.
l RESULTS (ne) produced by merging temperature cards.
Output files
l DATA ns.
l RESULTS ns
ne = number of the highest level substructure.

ns = number of each zero level substructure.
Notes:
l The output files are automatically saved.
l There are as many DATA (ns) and RESULTS (ns) files as there are zero level substructures.
c) Input data
SPLIT SUPERELEMENT (ne) (REORDER)

<reordering front>
RETURN
Notes:
l The reordering front must be the same as that specified for reordering the assembled geometry, if
this has been carried out.
l It is advisable to reorder the geometry for all thermal analyses (see 12.2)
d) Example
Suppose that a structure is divided into substructures in the manner symbolized by the following
tree :

© 2019 ESI Group
13.11 The command SPLIT
The thermoelastic analysis of such a structure must be executed as follows :

l definition of superelements 1, 2, 3, 4 ;
l definition of substructures 10, 20 ;
l assembly of the superelements, and reordering of the assembled structure where appropriate;
l thermal analysis of the assembled structure ;
l execution of the routine SPLIT :
SPLIT SUPERELEMENT 20 REORDER

<reordering front>
RETURN
l thermoelastic analysis of each superelement.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.12 The Command MINMAX
13.12 THE COMMAND MINMAX

a) Introduction
This command may be used to find the maximum and minimum principal stresses at each node
over a set of load cases.
b) Files
files
l DATA
l NODAL
l STRESS
Output files
l DATA
l DISPLACEMENT
The output file DISPLACEMENT consists of two load cases, the first being the minimum
values and the second the maximum values.
The title of the file NODAL STRESS is replaced by that specified after the command
MINMAX.
c) Input data
MINMAX
Title
SUPPRESS MINI mn MAXI mx
RETURN
The command SUPPRESS may be used to specify that a maximum value and/or a minimum
value is not to be taken into account by the routine MINMAX.
In this command:
mn = minimum value to be ignored.
mx = maximum value to be ignored.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.13 The Command SHELL
13.13 THE COMMAND SHELL

a) Introduction
The routine SHELL may be used to calculate stresses on the upper, middle and lower surfaces
of thick shell elements (element type 2006 or 2008), from data on the file STRESS.
b) Files
Input files
l DATA
l STRESS (n)
Output files
results are printed but no output files are created.
c) Input data
SHELL
ELEMENTS m1 m2 mi... (INTERNAL)
E (Label)
COMBINE
Title / (c1, n1) (ci, ni)...
RETURN
Description
SHELL Initiates execution of the routine.

ELEMENTS Selects elements (mandatory) ; the command ELEMENTS must begin
in column 1, whereas in continuation lines column 1 must be left blank.
These specifications are additive.
By default, there are no selected elements.
Labels
l INTERNAL: specifies that the numbers of elements are internal numbers.
l TYPE 2006 or 2008: selects elements of a particular type.
l DIMENSION i: for which i must equal 2.
l MATERIAL i: selects elements of material type i.
l LOAD i: selects elements for which the number in the LOAD column of EXTRACT ELEMENT is i.
Only one of the labels TYPE, MATERIAL, LOAD or DIMENSION is allowed in each
command.

© 2019 ESI Group
The end of the list of labels is recognized by the appearance of the command COMBINE.
COMBINE defines the combinations of loading to be considered. The command is
followed by one or more groups of data in which are specified the
desired combinations of load cases. Each group of data is of the
following form:
Title /(c1, n1)... (ci, ni)...
Column 1 must be left blank.
Ci is the factor by which load case ni is to be multiplied.
RETURN terminates execution of the routine.
Example

SHELL
ELEMENTS 101 102
E 1 2 INTERNAL
E TYPE 2008
E MATERIAL 2
E LOAD 1
COMBINE
LOAD 1 / 1 1
LOAD 1 + 3* LOAD 2 / 1 1 3 2
RETURN
d) Results
For each element, the following results are computed.
Table 13.6

© 2019 ESI Group
Table 13.7
Notes:
l This routine is not to be used to calculate stresses in elements of types other than 2006 or 2008
(results are unpredictable).
l This routine creates no output files, but prints all computed results.
e) Layered composite element
In the case of a layered composite element, the SHELL COMPOSITE command calculates
stresses in each layer with respect to the layered composite axes.
Input data:
SHELL COMPOSITE
ELEMENT parameters for selection
COMPOSITE LAYER m TO l CRITERION HILL ph1...ph4 TSAI pt1 ... pt7
COMBINE
title / (ci, ni)
..
COMPOSITELAYER n ...
COMBINE
..
RETURN
Results are given at each Gaussian point:

l on the middle surface for a layer
l on the upper, middle and lower surfaces for a shell.
COMPOSITE Specifies that the shell is a laminated composite shell. If not, an error
message will be generated.
LAYER n TO l Specify the layer numbers selected.
CRITERION Specify which criterion must be calculated.
HILL and / or Both can be used together. Each must be followed by its parameters.
TSAI

© 2019 ESI Group
HILL Xl Yl R S Allowable tensile stress in the principal l direction (fiber direction).

Xl Yl:Allowable tensile stress in the principal t direction (transversal fiber
direction).
R: Allowable shear stress in the lt plane.
S: Allowable shear stress in the tt plane.
The expression is given by:
with:
Sll, Slt, Stt, Slz, Stz being the stresses in principal axes.
l : fiber direction
t : transverse fibber direction
z : transverse and perpendicular to t direction.
TSAI Xl Yl R S Xc Yc F12
Xl Yl R S : same as for the HILL criterion
Xc : Allowable compressive stress in the principal l direction (fibber direction)
Yc :Allowable compressive stress in the principal t direction (transversal fibber direction)
F12 : Allowable biaxial loading stress, with the constraint that F12 must satisfy a stability
criterion of the form :
1/Xl/Xc/Yl/Yc - F12**2 >0
The expression is given by:

© 2019 ESI Group
13.14 Three-Dimensional
13.14 THREE-DIMENSIONAL
a) Introduction
This module is used to create the geometry and three-dimensional results for an analysis with
one of the following computation options:
l THREE-DIMENSIONAL HARMONIC
l SHELL HARMONIC
l SHELL AXISYMMETRICAL HARMONIC SHED.
b) SHELL HARMONIC and THREE-DIMENSIONAL HARMONIC

Files
Input:
l DATA: 2-D computation geometry
l RESULTS: results (amplitudes) associated with each harmonic (one load per harmonic).
Output:
l DATA: reconstituted 3-D geometry
l RESULTS: associated results for selected loads.
The 3- D geometry is formed by rotation or translation of the 2- D geometry used for

computation. The user specifies the subdivisions required. The following elements are
created:

© 2019 ESI Group
Input data
The DATA and RESULTS m1 files are for harmonic analysis.

THREE-DIMENSIONAL command
DISPLACEMENT This label is used for computation of displacements at the nodes of the
new geometry.
FORCES This label is used to compute forces in the elements of the new
geometry.
The DISPLACEMENTS and FORCES labels can coexist. By default, only displacements are
computed.
GENERATE command
This command defines the 3-D geometry to be constructed.
ANGLE = t Gives the value in degrees of the angular sector (axisymmetrical option)
or the length (TRANSLATION option) to be represented.
SUBDIVISION Indicates the number of subdivisions of the angular sector or length
= isub required.
CLOSE Used to close the axisymmetrical geometries generated over 360°.
DISTRIBUTION command
DISTRIBUTION α1, α2..., αk with (αk - α1 = t)
This command is used to define the angles or lengths for any distribution. By default,
subdivision is regular.

© 2019 ESI Group
LOAD and COMBINE commands

LOAD ni Used to construct 3-D results associated with the harmonic
corresponding to input data load ni.
COMBINE Followed by a line of data comprising a title field (from second
column), a slash (/) and pairs of values (Ci, ni), used to display any
load.
The DATA and RESULTS m2 files contain reconstituted 3-D model data.
c) SHELL AXISYMMETRIC HARMONIC SHED option
Input files :
l DATA : 2-D axisymmetrical geometry
l TRANSIENT : (permanent file - the SEARCH command is ineffective)
Output files :
l DATA : generated 3-D geometry
l TRANSIENT : results relative to 3-D geometry.
Input data
THREE-DIMENSIONAL TRANSIENT n (DISPLACEMENT ) (FORCE or STRESS)

GENERATE ANGLE t SUBDIVISION isub
DISTRIBUTION ai
FOURIER ni nhi
RETURN
THREE-DIMENSIONAL Command
TRANSIENT n Number of the permanent TRANSIENT file from which the 2-D
Fourier displacements and stresses are read.
DISPLACEMENT This option allows the choice of angular sector and its subdivision to
expand the geometry, without consideration of the sector used in
Fourier calculation.
FORCES or In this option, the angular sector must be the same as the one used in
STRESS the Fourier calculation. The subdivisions must be regular, with the
same number of points as the integration points in the θ direction.
The DISPLACEMENT and STRESS labels are mutually exclusive.

© 2019 ESI Group
GENERATE Command
ANGLE t t = value in degrees of the angular sector used to generate the 3-D
geometry.
SUBDIVISION If the STRESS label is input in the THREE-DIMENSIONAL
isub command isub must be the number of integration points in θ.
If the DISPLACEMENT label is input in the THREE
DIMENSIONAL command, isub is the requested number of
subdivisions in θ.
DISTRIBUTION Command
DISTRIBUTION α i are the angular values in degrees of the distribution of subsectors in
αi case of the DISPLACEMENT label (i=1 to isub and α (isub)= t). θ = 0
corresponds to the X axis.
FOURIER Command
FOURIER Selects among the NF Fourier harmonics used in the TRANSIENT
SHELL calculation those required to create the deformed 3-D
geometry.
ni (i=1 to NF) is the order number of the Fourier harmonic selected
among those used in the calculation.
nhi (i=1 to NF) is the harmonic value (cos(nhi*θ))
Example
SEARCH DATA 7020

THREE-DIMENS TRANSIENT 7020 DISPLA
GENERATE ANGLE 15 SUBDIV 9
FOURIER 1 0 2 12 3 24 4 36 5 48
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
13.15 LOCAL
13.15.1 Introduction
The routine LOCAL allows the calculation of displacements (or temperatures) along the
boundaries of a refined local model, from the interpolation of a 'coarse' model solution.
Field of application :
l two dimensional analysis
l three dimensional analysis
l thermal analysis
l thermoelastic analysis.
13.15.2 Files
The user prepares a first finite element model of a large

portion of the structure (fig. A). We call this, the 'coarse'
model. After a SYSTUS analysis, the user then saves input
data and results files.
The user determines a detailed finite element model of the
interesting portion (stress concentration for example), and
saves the geometry (fig. B). We call this the 'fine' model. It
is also necessary to know the boundary nodes of the refined
local model.
Input files:
l DATA: coarse mesh
l RESULTS: coarse mesh
l DATA: fine mesh
Output files:
mechanical analysis :
l LOCALM.DATA: formatted file of imposed displacements.
thermoelastic analysis :
l LOCALT.DATA: formatted file of interpolated temperatures.
l DATA, RESULTS: binary files containing interpolated temperatures at all nodes of the fine
mesh.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
13.15.3 Input Data

There are two principal groups, according to which type of analysis is chosen (mechanical or
thermoelastic).
Mechanical Analysis
We want to obtain imposed node displacements of the fine mesh boundaries.
LOCAL COARSE cr FINE fi (EXTRACT) RESULT re FILE (label)

LOADS l1 l3 ... li
SELECT Nodes n1 n2 ....., ni a nj
RETURN
Definition of commands
LOCAL Command
COARSE Search for coarse mesh data file number cr.
FINE Search for fine mesh data file number fi.
EXTRACT Printout of the data being copied (optional).
RESULT Search for coarse mesh displacement file number re.
FILE Creates a permanent formatted file containing interpolation results. The
default name is LOCALM.DATA.
(label) Is the name specified by the user. It is a string of 24 characters.
LOAD Command
This command reads the specified loads.
li... list of the number of applied loads defined on the coarse mesh and used
in fine model analysis.
SELECT Command
NODES Reads the fine mesh boundary nodes.
nj... List of node input numbers.
RETURN Command
This compulsory command terminates the reading of input data and initiates creation of the
output file.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
Results
LOCALM.DATA (or file name specified by the user) contains three groups of records:
l the file header is composed of four lines:
o name of created file
o fine mesh file labels (see chapter 3.2.5 'FILE LABELS')
o title of the problem
o parameters (see chapter 3.2.5 'FILE LABELS')
l constraints card :
l loads card :
2 LOAD CASE NB l3 OF THE COARSE MESH
Comments:
if a boundary node does not belong to any element of the coarse mesh
a) an error message is printed on the screen.
b) corresponding displacements are printed as 1.E+10 in the output file.
Use of program
The user includes LOCALM.DATA in the fine model INPUT FILE, as initial conditions, and
he adds the other commands like SOLVE, SAVE... in order to run SYSTUS.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
Thermoelastic Analysis
A thermoelastic analysis requires knowledge of the nodal temperature card. It is therefore
necessary to interpolate temperature at all nodes of the refined mesh. There are two possibilities
according to which type of output file is wanted : formatted (coded) or unformatted (binary),
(see section 4.13: command TEMPERATURE).
A) The output file is formatted
LOCAL COARSE cr FINE fi (EXTRACT) TEMPERATURE te FILE (label)

LOADS l1 l3 ... li
RETURN
LOCAL Command
COARSE Search for coarse mesh data file number cr.
FINE Search for fine mesh data file number fi.
(EXTRACT) Printout of the data being copied (optional).
TEMPERATURE Search for te file number containing nodal temperatures of the coarse
model.
FILE Creates a permanent formatted file containing nodal interpolated
temperatures. The default name is LOCALT.DATA.
(label) Is the name specified by the user. It is a string of 24 characters.
LOAD Command
This command reads the specified loads.
li... List of the number of loads defined on the coarse mesh (in fact, the
number of temperature card) and used in fine model analysis.
RETURN Command
This compulsory command terminates the reading of input data and initiates creation of the
output file.
Results
LOCALT.DATA (or file name specified by the user) contains two groups of records.
l file header : is composed of four lines
o name of created file
o fine mesh file labels (see Chapter 3.2.5 'FILE LABELS')
o title of the problem
o parameters (see Chapter 3.2.5 'FILE LABELS')

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
l temperature card :
TEMPERATURES i
N1 / t1 t2 ....ti
N2 /...
.
.
.
With
i the number of temperature cards
ti the nodal temperature corresponding to the card i
Notes:
l The number of temperature cards is limited to 32.
l SYSTUS allows 4 continuation commands.
l Less than or equal to 1.E-15 interpolated temperatures are printed as 0. in the output file.
Use of program
The user includes LOCALT.DATA in the description file of the refined model, and he adds
other applied loads and commands like SOLVE, SAVE... in order to run SYSTUS.
B) The output file is unformatted
LOCAL COARSE cr FINE fi (EXTRACT) TEMPERATURE te BINARY bi

LOADS l1 l3 li...
RETURN
LOCAL Command
COARSE cf. Chap.13.16.3
FINE
EXTRACT
TEMPERATURE searches the TEMPERATURE file
BINARY bi creates two permanent binary files :
RESULTS containing nodal interpolated temperatures
DATA containing the fine mesh description.
bi is the number under which files will be catalogued.
LOAD Command
(see Chapter 13.16.3)

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
RETURN Command
(see Chapter 13.16.3)
Computed Result
RESUbi.TIT and DATAbi.TIT are accessed by using the command SEARCH.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
13.15.4 Example
The structure under consideration is a flat plate (h = 1) under uniform tension and with a central
hole. On account of the symmetry, we only consider a quarter of the model.
We consider a small portion near the edge of the hole, and create the fine mesh (50 elements,
181 nodes).

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
Input Data of the Coarse Mesh

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
First Definition of the Fine Mesh

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
Boundary Nodal Displacement Interpolation

Definition:
LOCAL COARSE 2 FINE 20 EXTRACT RESULTS 2 FILE

LOAD 1
SELECT NODES 6, 11 TO 20, 37 TO 46
RETURN
END
Computed result :LOCALM.DATA file

© 2019 ESI Group
13.15 Local
Input Data of the Fine Mesh, after including LOCALM.DATA

© 2019 ESI Group
13.16 A Posteriori Error Estimator
13.16 A POSTERIORI ERROR ESTIMATOR

13.16.1 General
Linear static solution (command SOLVE) provides 2 kinds of file:
l RESULTS file which includes:
o DISPLACEMENTS file containing the displacements of the nodes of the model
o REACTIONS file containing the reactions at each node
o FORCES file containing the generalized forces or the stresses, according to the calculation
option, at the element center.

l STRESSES file containing for each element, the strains, the stresses and the discretization
functions at each integration point.
The command AVERAGE STRESSES STRAINS (see section 13.2.5) uses data on the
STRESSES file and completes the RESULTS file by adding:
l a STRESSES NODES file containing the averaged stresses at the nodes
l a STRAINS NODES file containing the averaged strains at the nodes.
These results correspond to the discretization (or mesh) which is used. The finite element
method (degree of freedom=node) provides a continuous approximation of the displacement
field, but a discontinuous approximation of the stress and strain fields. The stresses and strains
are continuous inside the element, but are discontinuous between elements.
The a posteriori error assessment methods consist in quantifying these discontinuities.
The method implemented in SYSTUS is presented below.
The procedure AVERAGE provides nodal values of stresses and strains. So, it is possible to
build continuous stress or strain fields on the global model or on a part of the model (in case of
several materials) by using the shape functions of the elements.
The a posteriori error calculation can be obtained by :
where
Ω : denotes the error calculation domain

σ : stress field (discontinuous) resulting directly from the finite element computation.
σn : stress field (continuous) resulting from the averaging procedure.
Of course, this method is also available for strains, thermal flux, etc.

© 2019 ESI Group
13.16 A Posteriori Error Estimator
13.16.2 Application Fields

This postprocessor is only available for the following options:
l TWO-DIMENSIONAL (2D elements only)
l THREE-DIMENSIONAL (3D elements only)
l THERMAL
l ELECTROSTATIC
l ELECTROKINETIC (2D or 3D elements)
l MAGNETIC SCALAR
l MAGNETIC VECTOR
l MAGNETIC FIELD
with command SOLVE.
13.16.3 Input Data

Input files
l DATA file
l RESULTS file containing STRESSES NODES and STRAINS NODES files.
l STRESSES file
CHECK ERROR
ELEMENT (list)
RETURN
ELEMENT (list) defines the list of elements for which error calculation is required. This
list is compulsory and must be included in the list defined in the
procedure AVERAGE.
Output file
l modified DATA file
l RESULTS file including a FORCE file containing 2 components per element and per load
case. The first component represents the stress (or thermal flux ...) error for the element. The
second component represents the strain (or thermal gradient...) error.
The following are also printed:
l stress error in the domain (selected elements)
l strain error in the domain.
13.16.4 Error Analysis

The command COMBINE FORCE can be used to print the error values for all the elements.
Other analysis procedures are described in chapters 13 and 14.

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 14 POSTPROCESSING AND GRAPHIC OUTPUT
14.1 Introduction
CHAPTER 14 POSTPROCESSING AND

GRAPHIC OUTPUT
14.1 INTRODUCTION
The post-processing phase uses *.TIT file input data, and creates its own POST*.fdb format
files. This corresponds to the result CONVERT procedure (* is an integer between 1 and
9999). If conversion is performed on a reduced geometry, the DATA file is modified also.
The OPEN and CLOSE commands are used for POST*.fdb open and close respectively.
The AVERAGING POST-PROCESSING procedure is used to transfer element results to the
nodes, and average results on the nodes. This procedure works on a previously opened
POST*.fdb file.
The VISUALIZATION procedure is used to display the results contained in the POST*.fdb
file, in deformed geometry, vector, tensor, isovalue, etc. form. This procedure works on a
previously opened POST*.fdb file.
Figure 14-1 Post-processing

© 2019 ESI Group
14.1 Introduction
The various graphics options presented from section 14.6 to section 14.10 are only available in
command mode (these commands are not interfaced). The SYSTUS plotter is driven by the
following procedures:
PROCEDURE FONCTION
CURVE POST- Plotting of the variation of results for a sequence of
PROCESSING nodes or elements or on a cross section. Data is read
from the file POST-PROCESSING (POST*.TIT).
CURVE TRANSIENT Plotting of the variation of results with respect to time,
another result, or load steps.
CURVE FUNCTION Plotting of functions defined by tables in the file DATA.
CURVE SATURATION Plotting of magnetization curves for electromagnetism
analyses.
CURVE TABULATION Plotting of curves defined point by point by the user
CURVE AVERAGE Calculates and plots, for a specified component of results
for a thick-walled structure, the following data:
l average value,
l linearised value,
l the differences:
l inner surface value - middle surface value,
l outer surface value - middle surface value, for each
combination of load cases.

© 2019 ESI Group
14.2 Open - Close
14.2 OPEN - CLOSE

The following command is used to open a post-processing file:
OPEN POST n
n = number of post-processing file to be opened (1 to 9999).

The following command is used to close a post-processing file:
CLOSE POST
This command is only required for chained display of a number of post-processing files.
Example
SEARCH DATA 1217

OPEN POST 1217
VISUALIZATION
...
RETURN
CLOSE POST

© 2019 ESI Group
14.3 Post-Processing File Result Conversion
14.3 POST-PROCESSING FILE RESULT CONVERSION

14.3.1 CONVERT Procedure
The CONVERT procedure uses DATA*.TIT, RESU*.TIT, STRE*.TIT or TRAN*TIT, and
creates a POST*.fdb post-processing file which can be printed or used in the graphic mode.
The POST*.fdb file comprises a set of value arrays designated "DATASETS".
Two types of input data are possible, according to the type of file to be converted.
To convert a RESULTS and/or STRESSES file:
CONVERT RESU STRE

POST num
(NODES list)
(ELEMENTS list)
STRUCTURE (GROUP) or (NOGROUP)
(FILE choice)
(AXES (GENERAL) or LOCAL)
(LOADS or MODES list)
RETURN
To convert a TRANSIENT file:
CONVERT TRAN
POST num
(NODES list)
(ELEMENTS list)
(FILE choice)
(AXES (GENERAL) or LOCAL)
(CARDS list)
RETURN
n number of DATA, RESU, STRE and TRAN files to be found (1 to

9999). The RESU and STRE labels can be present simultaneously.
POST num number of the POST file created
NODES, list of nodes or elements with internal or user-supplied numbering (or
ELEMENTS groups of nodes or elements). If these labels are not given, the
complete geometry is selected.
STRUCTURE In the presence of the NOGROUP label, the group datasets are not
(GROUP or written in the post file. By default, GROUP is active.
NOGROUP)

© 2019 ESI Group
FILE choice choice of result type to be converted.

For static linear analysis: DISPLACEMENT, REACTION, FORCE
For dynamic analysis: DISPLACEMENT, VELOCITY,
ACCELERATION, REACTION, FORCE.
For linear or non-linear static or dynamic analysis: DISPLACEMENT,
VELOCITY, ACCELERATION, REACTION, FORCE,
PRESSURE, VALUE, LAYER.
By default, all types of result are taken into account.
The label MEAN specifies that Gauss point values will not stored in
the POST file.
AXES choice of reference frame for result conversion. By default, results are
converted in the general reference frame. Note: local reference frame
conversion is recommended for the display of stresses in beams.
LOADS list of loads or modes according to analysis. By default, all loads or
modes are taken into account.
CARDS list of transient file cards. By default, all transient file cards are taken
into account.
Example
SEARCH DATA TRAN 32

CONVERT TRAN
POST 32
ELEMENT INTER 1 TO 100
FILE FORCE
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
14.3.2 Post-Processing File Conversion - Printout

The content of a post-processing file can be printed as follows:
CONVERT PRINT (DATASET)

(POST num)
(NUMBER n1 n2... ni)
RETURN
PRINT if the DATASET label is absent, only the Dataset list is printed.
DATASET if the NUMBER command is absent, all values are printed for all
Datasets.
POST num number of the post file created.
NUMBER n1 If list of numbers n1 n2... ni is absent, only the problem characteristics
n2... ni are printed.
If list of numbers n1 n2... ni is present, the corresponding Datasets are
printed.
Number/Dataset correspondence is obtained by executing the
CONVERT PRINT command initially without the DATASET label.
All Datasets are listed with their numbers, and the problem
characteristics.
Example
CONVERT PRINT
POST 32
RETURN
...
<list of Datasets and problem characteristics>
...
CONVERT PRINT DATASET
POST 32
NUMBER 10 51
RETURN
...
<content list for Datasets numbers 10 and 51>
...

© 2019 ESI Group
14.3.3 Dataset
Dataset Name
Each dataset name (max. 31 characters) takes the following form:
<name>.<code> : <identifier_1> <identifier_2>
<name> abbreviated dataset name. Example: DISSIP_POWER is total
dissipated power.
<code> represents the type of data stored (array) in the dataset:
COM characters
N node data,
E element data,
P integration point data,
EL data for nodes associated with elements,
T array,
TL indexed array,
M media data.
<identifier_1> is a load number for a RESULT file conversion,
or a load card number for a TRANSIENT file conversion.
<identifier_2> is used for result location:
l beam : section point number (1 to 9),
l shell : surface number: -3 (lower surface), -2(middle surface), -1 (upper
surface),
l shell : station number: -11 (1st station), ..., -19 (9th station),
l standard elements : 0.
<identifier_3> is used for location of the layer results for a composite shell.
Note:
l Identifiers only exist for result-related datasets (see below).
List of Data-Related Datasets

General Datasets
PARAMETER.INT.T problem parameters:
l number of nodes,
l number of elements,
l number of media,
l problem dimension,
l number of dof per node,
l number of integration points,
l number of equations,
l number of loads.

© 2019 ESI Group
PARAMETER.HOL.T problem title (string of max. 80 characters).

PARAMETER.HOL.T :<identifier_1> load title (string of max. 80 characters).
Discretization-Related Datasets
NID.N problem title (string of max. 80 characters)
X.N node coordinates
EID.E user-supplied element number
ELEM.NODE.EL element connectivity
ELEM.FORM.E element form
ELEM.TYPE.E element type
ELEM.POINT.EL integration point number
ELEM.P number of element to which the integration point is attached
X.P integration point coordinates in the global reference frame
X_LOCAL.P reduced integration point coordinates
VOLUME.P integration point coefficient:
l length for 1D elements,
l surface for 2D elements,
l volume for 3D elements.
Media-Related Datasets
MID.M media number
MEDIA.TYPE.M media type
List of Result-Related Datasets

The list of datasets for each physical domain is given below. The dataset name is as obtained
by the CONVERT PRINT procedure. The interpretation, type (scalar, vector or tensor) and
equivalent graphic interface name is shown opposite each dataset name. The graphic interface
name is the name displayed in the Results selection box (see (1) in Fig. 14.2 below).

© 2019 ESI Group
Figure 14-2: Results Selection Dialogue Box

Example:
For a mechanical problem, dataset "D" is displayed by "DISPLACEMENTS (At nodes)" in the
results selection box.
Notes
l The <codes> associated with result type datasets are not shown below. This location indicator
code depends on the type of analysis and/or whether the results are subject to modification
(averaging procedure for example).
l All .E or .P format datasets generate .EL format datasets after the first phase of extrapolation to
the nodes of each element, and .N format datasets after averaging between these nodes.
Mechanical Problems
D U displacements (vector type)
DISPLACEMENTS
ROTATION R rotations (vector type)
ROTATIONS

© 2019 ESI Group
V dU/dt velocities (vector type)

VELOCITIES
D_ROTATION dR/dt rotation 1st derivatives (vector type)
ROTATION_RATES
A accelerations (vector type)
ACCELERATIONS
DD_ROTATION rotation 2nd derivative (vector type)
ROTATION_ACCELERATIONS
R reactions (vector type)
REACTIONS
MOMENT moments of resistance (vector type)
RESIST_MOMENTS
VEL_POT UP potential (scalar type)
POTENTIAL
D_VEL_POT dUP/dt potential 1st derivative (scalar type)
POTENTIAL_RATE
DD_VEL_POT potential 2nd derivative (scalar type)
DYNAMIC_REDUCED_PRESSURE
R_VEL_POT potential reaction (scalar type)
POTENTIAL_REACTION
FORCE_CONTACT contact forces (vector type)
CONTACT_FORCE
PRESS_CONTACT contact pressures (vector type)
CONTACT_PRESSURE
S Cauchy stresses (tensor type)
for continuous media:
STRESSES
for axisymmetrical, spatial shells or plate options:
SHELL_SURF_STRESSES
S_PK Piola-Kirchhoff stresses (tensor type)
PIOLAKIRCHHOFF_STRESSES
E strains (tensor type)
for continuous media options
STRAINS
SHELL_SURF_STRAINS
SFM_FORCE Nx force for bars or cables (vector type)
FORCES
SFM_BEAM_FORCE forces for beams (vector type): Nx, Qy and Qz
BEAM_FORCES
SFM_BEAM_MOMENT beam moments (vector type): Mx, My and Mz
BEAM_MOMENTS

© 2019 ESI Group
S_BEAM stresses on beam nodes (tensor type)

BEAM_POINT_STRESSES
SFM_SHELL_MEMBR shell membrane forces (tensor type): Nx, Ny, Nxy
SHELL_MEMBR_FORCES
SFM_SHELL_MOMENT shell moments (tensor type): Mx, My, Mxy
SHELL_MOMENTS
SFM_SHELL_CUTTING shell shear forces (vector type): Tx and Ty
SHELL_TRANSV_SHEAR_FORCES
S_SHELL shell surface stresses (tensor type)
SHELL_SURF_STRESSES
E_SHELL shell surface strains (tensor type)
SHELL_SURF_STRAINS
SE total strain energy (scalar type)
STRAIN_ENERGY
SE_DENSITY strain energy per unit of volume (scalar type)
STRAIN_ENERGY_DENSITY
TEMP temperature (scalar type)
TEMPERATURE²
E_THER thermal strain (scalar type)
THERMAL_STRAIN
E_TOTAL_PLAST (visco)plastic strain (tensor type)
TOTAL_PLAST_STRAINS
E_EQUIV_PLAST cumulative equivalent (visco)plastic strain (scalar type)
CUMUL_PLASTIC_STRAIN
D_E_EQUIV_PLAST equivalent viscoplastic strain rate (scalar type)
EQUIV_PLASTIC_STRAIN_RATE
E_EQUIV_CREEP cumulative equivalent creep strain (scalar type)
for continuous media options:
CUMUL_CREEP_STRAIN
SHELL_SURF_CUMUL_CREEP_STRAIN
SY_HARD isotropic hardening variable (scalar type)
ISOTR_HARD_VAR
SHELL_SURF_ISOTR_HARD_VAR
SK_HARD kinematic hardening variable (tensor type)
KINEM_HARD_VAR
SHELL_SURF_KINEM_HARD_VAR

© 2019 ESI Group
SK_HARD_CHAB CHABOCHE model kinematic hardness variable No. 2

(tensor type)
for continuous media options
CHAB_KINEM_HARD_VAR
SHELL_SURF_CHAB_KINEM_HARD_VAR
EK_HARD_MEMORY CHABOCHE model kinematic hardness memory variable
(tensor type)
KINEM_MEMORY_VAR
SHELL_SURF_KINEM_MEMORY_VAR
EY_HARD_MEMORY CHABOCHE model isotropic hardness memory variable
(scalar type)
ISOTR_MEMORY_VAR
SHELL_SURF_ISOTR_MEMORY_VAR
SY_HARD_SAT CHABOCHE model isotropic saturated variable Q (scalar
type)
ISOTROPIC_SATUR_VARIABLE_Q
SY_S1 LEBLOND model first yield stress k or SIG1 (scalar type)
FIRST_YIELD_STRESS
SY_S2 LEBLOND model second yield stress SIG2 (scalar type)
SECOND_YIELD_STRESS
POROSITY porosity (scalar type)
POROSITY
D_POROSITY porosity variation rate (scalar type)
POROSITY_RATE
DAMAGE damage parameter (scalar type)
DAMAGE_VARIABLE
DAMAGE_BETA damage parameter B. Rousselier model (type scalaire)
DAMAGE_VARIABLE_BETA
VOLUME_RATIO post-strain mass density ratio (scalar type)
MASS_DENSITY_RHO
S_EQUIV_VISC viscous stress (scalar type)
VISCOUS_STRESS
SHELL_SURF_VISCOUS_STRESS
Additional datasets for contact elements
CONTACT_FORCE contact force between contactor and target surfaces expressed
in the global reference frame:
CONTACT_FORCE

© 2019 ESI Group
Additional datasets for layered shells

S Cauchy stresses (tensor type)
SHELL_LAYER_STRESSES
SK_HARD kinematic hardening variable (tensor type)
SHELL_LAYER_KINEM_HARD_VAR
E_TOTAL_PLAST equivalent (visco)plastic strain (tensor type)
SHELL_LAYER_TOTAL_PLAST_STRAIN
E_EQUIV_PLAST total equivalent (visco)plastic strain (tensor type)
SHELL_LAYER_CUMUL_PLAST_STRAIN
D_E_EQUIV_PLAST equivalent viscoplastic strain rate (scalar type) for creep model
21
SHELL_LAYER_EQ_PLAST_STRAIN_RATE
SK_HARD_CHAB CHABOCHE model kinematic hardness variable No. 2
(tensor type)
SHELL_LAYER_CHAB_KINEM_HARD_VAR
EK_HARD_MEMORY CHABOCHE model kinematic hardness memory variable
(tensor type)
KINEM_MEMORY_VAR
SHELL_SURF_ KINEM_MEMORY_VAR
EY_HARD_MEMORY CHABOCHE model isotropic hardness memory variable
(scalar type)
ISOTR_MEMORY_VAR
SHELL_SURF_ISOTR_MEMORY_VAR
DAMAGE damage (scalar type)
SHELL_LAYER_DAMAGE
S_EQUIV_VISC viscous stress for CHABOCHE model (scalar type)
SHELL_LAYER_VISCOUS_STRESS
S_EQUIV_CREEP (visco)plastic equivalent strain pour for creep models 1 and 2
(scalar type)
SHELL_LAYER_CUMUL_CREEP_STRAIN
SE total strain energy for civil engineering model (scalar type)
SHELL_LAYER_STRAIN_ENERGY
DAMAGE damage for civil engineering model (scalar type)
DOMMAGE _STAT_COQUE
Additional datasets composite shells
S layer Cauchy stresses (tensor type)
SHELL_LAYER_STRESSES

© 2019 ESI Group
E layer strains (tensor type)

SHELL_LAYER_STRAINS
CRIT_LAYER 10 layer criteria (scalars type)
SHELL_ LAYER_CRITERIA
CRIT_MAX_LAYER 10 layer maximum criteria (scalars type)
SHELL_ LAYER_MAX_CRITERIA
Additional datasets for COQD and COQ8 options
E_TOTAL_PLAST (visco)plastic strain (tensor type)
SHELL_SURF_TOTAL_PLASTIC_STRAINS
E_EQUIV_PLAST equivalent (visco)plastic strain (scalar type)
SHELL_SURF_CUMUL_PLAST_STRAIN
E_TOTAL_CREEP total creep strain (tensor type)
SHELL_SURF_TOTAL_CREEP_STRAINS
SY_HARD isotropic hardening variable (scalar type)
SHELL_SURF_ISOTROPIC_HARD_VAR
Additional datasets for MECHANICS/METALLURGY option
E_EQUIV_PLAST_ALP 'alpha' phase cumulative equivalent (visco)plastic strain
(scalar type)
CUMUL_PLASTIC_STRAIN_ALPHA
E_EQUIV_PLAST_ 'gamma' phase cumulative equivalent (visco)plastic strain
GAM (scalar type)
CUMUL_PLASTIC_STRAIN_GAMMA
SK_HARD_ALPHA 'alpha' phase kinematic hardening variable (tensor type)
KINEM_HARD_VAR_ALPHA
SK_HARD_GAMMA 'gamma' phase kinematic hardening variable (tensor type)
KINEM_HARD_VAR_GAMMA
PHASES phase proportions (scalar type)
PHASE_PROPORTIONS
Thermal problems
TEMPERATURE
D_TEMP heating or cooling rate first temperature/time derivative (scalar
type)
TEMPERATURE_RATE
HEAT heat or power quantity (scalar type)
HEAT_POWER
HEAT_FLUX thermal flux (vector type)
HEAT_FLUX
With TRANSFER medium:
HEAT_FLUX thermal flux (vector type)
HEAT_FLUX

© 2019 ESI Group
V_FLUID mean flow velocity (scalar type)

FLUID_VELOCITY
HEAT_TRANSF_ transfer coefficient (scalar type)
COEF HEAT_TRANSFER_COEFFICIENT
and after extrapolation and averaging:
HEAT_FLUX heat flux (vector type)
HEAT_FLUX
TEMP_GRAD thermal gradient (vector type)
THERMAL_GRADIENT
Additional datasets for COQT thermal shells
TEMP_GENE generalized temperature (scalar type)
GENERALIZED_TEMPERATURE
Additional datasets for THERMICS/ENTHALPY option
ENTH H enthalpy (scalar type)
ENTHALPY
D_ENTH dH/dt enthalpy 1st derivative(scalar type)
ENTHALPY_RATE
Additional datasets for THERMICS/METALLURGY option
PHASES phase proportion (scalar type)
PHASE_PROPORTION
GRAIN_SIZE grain size (scalar type)
GRAIN_SIZE
Additional datasets for THERMICS/METALLURGY option (NANCY model)
AC1_TEMPERATURE AC1 temperature (scalar type)
AC1_TEMPERATURE
HARDNESS hardness (scalar type)
HARDNESS
Additional datasets for THERMICS/METALLURGY option (auxiliary variables)
AUX_VARIABLE auxiliary variables (scalar type)
AUXIL_VARIABLES
Electromagnetism
CHARGE QC electric charge (scalar type)
ELECTRIC_CHARGE
MAG_POT_S SS magnetic potential (scalar type)
SCALAR_MAGNETIC_POTENTIAL
MAG_POT_V Az magnetic potential (vector type)
VECTOR_MAGNETIC_POTENTIAL
D_MAG_POT_V VAz magnetic potential rate (vector type)
VECTOR_MAGNETIC_POTENTIAL_RATE

© 2019 ESI Group
ELEC_POT VV electric potential (scalar type)

ELECTRIC_POTENTIAL
I_ELEC_POT IVV electric potential integral (scalar type)
ELECTRIC_POTENTIAL_INTEGRAL
D_ELEC_POT VVV electric potential rate (scalar type)
ELECTRIC_POTENTIAL_RATE
ELEC_FIELD E electric field (vector type)
ELECTRIC_FIELD
ELEC_DISP D electric displacement (vector type)
ELECTRIC_DISPLACEMENT
J Ji electric current in z or Ii (vector type)
ELECTRIC_CURRENT
J_NORM II electric current (scalar type)
NORMAL_ELECTRIC_CURRENT
J_DENSITY J current density (vector type)
ELECTRIC_CURRENT_DENSITY
TEMPERATURE
MAG_FLUX_DENSITY B magnetic flux density (vector type)
MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY
D_MAG_FLUX_ B magnetic flux density rate (vector type)
DENSITY MAGNETIC_FLUX_DENSITY_RATE
MAG_FIELD H magnetic field (vector type)
MAGNETIC_FIELD
D_MAG_FIELD magnetic field rate corresponding to VHz (vector type)
MAGNETIC_FIELD_RATE
BS_MAG_FIELD Hi irrotational magnetic field (vector type)
BS_MAGNETIC_FIELD
MAG_FLUX_NORM BC magnetic flux (scalar type)
NORMAL_MAGNETIC_FLUX
DISSIP_POWER total dissipated power (scalar type)
DISSIPATED_POWER
DISSIP_POWER_DENS dissipated power density (scalar type)
DISSIPATED_POWER_DENSITY
MAG_ENERGY total magnetic energy (scalar type)
MAGNETIC_ENERGY
MAG_ENERGY_DENS magnetic energy density (scalar type)
MAGNETIC_ENERGY_DENSITY
ELEC_ENERGY electrostatic energy (scalar type)
ELECTROSTATIC_ENERGY
ELEC_ENERGY_DENS electrostatic energy density (scalar type)
ELECTROSTATIC_ENERGY_DENSITY

© 2019 ESI Group
LAPLACE_FORC Laplace force (vector type)

LAPLACE_FORCE
LAPLACE_FORC_DENS Laplace force density (vector type)
LAPLACE_FORCE_DENSITY
Diffusion – Trapping
ACTIVITY activity (scalar type)
ACTIVITY
Q_MASS_H2 hydrogen mass quantity (scalar type)
HYDROGEN_QUANTITY
D_ACTIVITY activity variation rate (scalar type)
ACTIVITY_RATE
MASS_FLUX mass flux (vector type)
MASS_FLUX
PERMEABILITY permeability (scalar type)
PERMEABILITY
SOLUB_SITE site solubility (scalar type)
SITE_SOLUBILITY
DIFFU_SITE site diffusion coefficient (scalar type)
SITE_DIFFUS_COEFF
CONCENTR_SITE site concentration (scalar type)
SITE_CONCENTRATION
Diffusion – Precipitation
ACTIVITY_ELEM chemical element activity (scalar type)
CHEMICAL_ELEMENT_ACTIVITY
Q_MASS_ELEM chemical element mass quantity (scalar type)
CHEMICAL_ELEMENT_FLOW'
D_ACTIVITY_ELEM chemical activity variation rate (scalar type)
CHEMICAL_ELEMENT_ACTIVITY_RATE
CONC_TOTAL_ELEM chemical element total concentration (scalar type)
TOTAL_CHEM_ELEMT_CONCENT
CONC_PRECI_ELEM chemical element precipitate concentration (scalar type)
PRECIP_CHEM_ELEMT_CONCENT
CONC_DIFFU_ELEM chemical element diffusable concentration (scalar type)
DIFFUS_CHEM_ELEMT_CONCENT
CONC_TOTAL_ total precipitate concentration (scalar type)
PRECIP PRECIPITATE_CONCENTRATION
CONC_EQUI_PRECIP equilibrium precipitate concentration (scalar type)
EQUILIBRIUM_PRECIP_CONCENT
Electro-thermics
ELEC_POT VV electric potential (scalar type)
ELECTRIC_POTENTIAL

© 2019 ESI Group
D_ELEC_POT VV electric potential 1st derivative (scalar type)

ELECTRIC_POTENTIAL_RATE
TEMPERATURE
D_TEMP heating or cooling rate temperature/time 1st derivative (scalar
type)
TEMPERATURE_RATE
HEAT heat or power quantity (scalar type)
HEAT_POWER
J_NORM II electric current (scalar type)
NORMAL_ELECTRIC_CURRENT
HEAT_FLUX heat flux (vector type)
HEAT_FLUX
ENTH H enthalphy -scalar type)
ENTHALPY
D_ENTH dH/dt enthalpy 1st derivative (scalar type)
ENTHALPY_RATE
J_DENSITY J current density (vector type)
ELECTRIC_CURRENT_DENSITY
ELEC_FIELD E electric field (vector type)
ELECTRIC_FIELD
DISSIP_POWER dissipated power (scalar type)
DISSIPATED_POWER
Additional datasets for ELECTRO-THERMIC/METALLURGY option
PHASES phase proportions (scalar type)
PHASE_PROPORTIONS
GRAIN_SIZE grain size (scalar type)
GRAIN_SIZE
List of Datasets for Media-Related Results

This type of result cannot be displayed at the present time. However, result values can be
printed.
VALUE.M values linked to each medium (scalar type)
MEDIA_VALUES
Dataset Attributes
Attributes stored in .fdb files are used to describe the data contained in a dataset.
Dataset attributes are stored under a name and a value.
Attributes name Value
Contents Character string describing content of dataset
Ex : For dataset D.N… : Displacements

© 2019 ESI Group
DataType Character string describing type of results.

It can be "Scalar" , "Vector", "Tensor" or "Scalars"
LoadCase Loadcase value (for RESULT or STRESS files in static) after the
SOLVE command
Frequency Frequency value (for RESULT or STRESS files in dynamic) after
the DYNAM command
LoadFactor Buckling coefficient (for RESULT or STRESS files in buckling)
Time Time value (for TRAN file) after the TRANSIENT command
Axes Character string describing axes in which results are stored: It can be
"General", "Local", "Material" or "Ply".

© 2019 ESI Group
14.4 Averaging Post-Processing
14.4 AVERAGING POST-PROCESSING

The commands described in this section refer to the averaging procedure applied to the
POST*.fdb post-processing file and the data file (DATA*.TIT). The commands should be
distinguished from those described in section 13.2, which apply to the SYSTUS DATA,
RESULTS and TRANSIENT files.
The principle of this procedure is nevertheless the same. Its purpose is as follows (Figure 14-3):
l transportation of element results to nodes (extrapolation procedure),
l averaging of node values obtained if necessary (averaging procedure).
Figure 14-3 AVERAGING procedure

The post-processing file is divided into a number of initial datasets (results), expressed at the
integration points (code P), in the element (code E) or at the element nodes (code EL),
according to the analysis performed. Code EL can only be used for an averaging operation.
The resultant postprocessing file is modified and completed according to the selected
conversion, by the inclusion of the results expressed on the nodes (code N) or element nodes
(code EL).
Notes:
l If the results are to be converted to values on the nodes, two datasets are generated. The first is
expressed on the element nodes, and corresponds to the extrapolation phase, and the second,
expressed on the nodes, corresponds to the averaging operation proper.
l For a problem involving surface elements, it is essential to eliminate these elements before
averaging.

© 2019 ESI Group
l A part is a set of similar elements which are made of the same material. The model is the sum of
all PARTS, each of them being disjointed from the others.The elements of a part have the same
dimension and the same material properties.
The averaging procedure is activated as follows:
AVERAGING POST-PROCESSING Command

Averaging comprises initial extrapolation of the results, followed a smoothing operation where
the different values for the same node are averaged. This makes it possible to convert results
expressed at the integration points, on the element, or on the element nodes, into results
expressed on the nodes or element nodes. The latter type of conversion is extremely useful for
multi-material averaging operations involving discontinuities (in which case each material is
associated with a group of elements).
EXTRAPOLATION Is used to convert results initially expressed at integration points or on
the element, into results expressed on the element nodes.
THRESHOLD Some datasets do not have to be extrapolated since their threshold must
not be exceeded. This is true notably for plasticity or phase proportions.
When THRESHOLD label is used, values at integration points are
extrapolated within the limit of the extreme value found in the element.
When THRESHOLD label is used, the values at nodes will remain
within the limit of the extreme values existing in the considered
element.
PRESSURE Computes from dataset FORCE_CONTACT the equivalent pressure at
nodes for linear or quadratic 1D elements. The equivalent pressure is
then stored in the dataset PRESS_CONTACT in the same de post-
processing file. If dataset FORCE_CONTACT does not exist or is not
selected this command has no effect.

© 2019 ESI Group
PART averages dataset results part by part . The averaging is done on the
elements selected potentially by the user.
MATERIAL averages dataset results on elements set by same material properties.
The averaging is done on the elements selected potentially by the user.
NODES, List of nodes or elements using internal or user-supplied numbering (or
ELEMENTS groups of nodes or elements). If these labels are omitted, the complete
geometry is selected.
INPUT Prints the list of datasets of the type requested: at integration points, on
element nodes or on the element.
DATASET Lists the numbers or names for the datasets to be averaged or
extrapolated. If this command is omitted, all datasets are listed.
OUTPUT Gives the type of dataset which will complete the post-processing file.
If this command is omitted, datasets at the element nodes are created.
Example
SEARCH DATA 32
OPEN POST32.fdb
AVERAGING POST-PROCESSING
ELEMENTS INTER 1 TO 100
INPUT INTEGRATION POINT
...
<list of Datasets>
...
DATASET 12 TO 24 STEP 2
OUTPUT NODE
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
14.5 Visualization of Results
14.5 VISUALIZATION OF RESULTS

The VISUALIZATION procedure is used to display the mesh of the structure studied, and
associated results.
Input data comprises data files (DATA*.TIT ) and post-processing files (POST*.fdb).
The VISUALISATION procedure is activated as follows:
VISUALIZATION Command
initiates the result display procedure. The list of datasets, and the list of cards or loads are
printed after this command.
LOAD List of loads.
CARD List of cards or a post-processing file created from a TRANSIENT file.
NODES, List of nodes or elements, using internal or user-supplied numbering (or
ELEMENTS groups of nodes or elements). If these labels are omitted, the complete
geometry described in the post-processing file is selected.

© 2019 ESI Group
COMBINATION A number of loads can be combined.

A title must be given to the combination. This title commences with
the second character of the command line.
Each term of the combination must take the form p*c, where p is a real
number, and c is a load (or card) number.
DATASET List of numbers or names corresponding to the datasets to be displayed.
The list of selected loads is printed after this command. Print order is
loads followed by combinations, in selection order.
In the case of selection by name, the type of dataset must be indicated:
l NODES: results are stored at the nodes of the structure, with one unique
result value per node.
l ELEMENT: results are stored on the structure elements, with one
uniform result value on the element.
l NODE ELEMENT: results are stored by element on the element nodes,
corresponding to several result values for the same node of the structure.
There can therefore be as many different result values as there are
elements connected to the node.
l INTEGRATION POINT: results are stored at the element integration
points, corresponding to one or more result values according to the
number of integration points for the element concerned.
CHOICE Number of a load or card (or list of numbers in the case of a curve)
which will be displayed.
DEFO Value of the deformed shape coefficient for the structure. The
deformed shape amplitude default value is set at 10 times the real value.
SURFACE For shell elements with i = LOW, MID or UPP.
SECTION Number of stress computation points in the section for 3D beam type
elements,
with j = 0 to 9.
If j = MAX, the point where the stress value is greatest is displayed.
GEOMETRY Geometry display.
SYMBOL Results are displayed in the form of symbols, associated with a scalar
quantity.
TENSOR Results are displayed in the form of tensors.
VECTOR Results are displayed in the form of vectors.
CONTOUR Results are displayed in the form of contours (isovalues), associated
with a scalar quantity.
ABSO To obtain the absolute value of the results.

© 2019 ESI Group
CURVE Display of results in the form of a curve associated with a scalar

quantity.
To display the curves of a transient file, the user must select the node or
element concerned, and the corresponding loads. The curve obtained is
as shown below (Figures 14.4 and 14.12):
Figure 14-4
To display results for a given load on part of the mesh, the user must
select the corresponding nodes and elements. The curve obtained is as
shown below (Figures 14.5 and 14.10):
Figure 14-5
To display the results of a number of loads for part of the mesh (e.g.,
evolution of results for a set of nodes in time), the user must select the
nodes or elements, and the corresponding loads. The resultant layer is
as shown below (Figures 14.6 and 14.11):

© 2019 ESI Group
Figure 14-6
EDIT used to print results in alphanumeric form in a window or FILE.

Results are printed in columns, separated by a TAB character. The
labels SCALAR, VECTOR, TENSOR, and VALUE indicate the type
of results edited. The user can import results under MicrosoftÒ Excel
(Microsoft and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation).
FILE indicates the name of the file in which the printed results are stored.
CLOSE EDIT closes the result printout window.
Important Note:
l The list of available operators is printed after commands GEOMETRY, SYMBOL, TENSOR,
VECTOR, CONTOUR, CURVE and EDIT. The number or name of the operator must be given,
preceded by a blank character.

© 2019 ESI Group
Example
SEARCH DATA 33
OPEN POST 33
VISUALIZATION
List of loads :
Card 0 - Time 0.000000 -

Card 1 - Time 0.010000 -
Card 2 - Time 0.058571 -
Card 3 - Time 0.107143 -
Card 4 - Time 0.155714 -
Card 5 - Time 0.204286 -
Card 6 - Time 0.252857 -
Card 7 - Time 0.301429 -
Card 8 - Time 0.350000 -
List of Dataset :
Dataset 1 - DISPLACEMENTS ( At nodes )

Dataset 2 - VELOCITIES ( At nodes )
Dataset 3 - ACCELERATIONS ( At nodes )
Dataset 4 - REACTIONS ( At nodes )
Dataset 5 - STRESSES ( In element )
Dataset 6 - STRESSES ( At integration points )
Dataset 7 - STRAINS ( In element )
Dataset 8 - STRAINS ( At integration points )
...
CARD 5 TO 8
COMBINATIONS
SPECIMEN CARD 6*2 / 2 6
DATASET 1
List of selected loads :
(1) - Card 5 - Time 0.204286 -

(2) - Card 6 - Time 0.252857 -
(3) - Card 7 - Time 0.301429 -
(4) - Card 8 - Time 0.350000 -
(5) - Combination 1 - SPACIMEN CARD 6*2

© 2019 ESI Group
The text in italics represents system response to the commands.
$view_point xy
GEOMETRY DEFO 10 CHOICE 4
$centre
$rendering none
Commands starting with the $ character are display commands described in the « Man/Machine
Commands » manual.
Figure 14-7: Card 8 deformed shape geometry

© 2019 ESI Group
$option mesh complete

$option legend /on
CONTOUR CHOICE 4
List of operators :
Operator 1 – Ux
Operator 2 – Uy
Operator 3 – Uz
Operator 4 - norm U
Operator 5 - Min components
Operator 6 - Max components
<space> Ux
Figure 14-8: Card 8 Ux displacement contours

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTOUR CHOICE 5 DEFO 10
List of operators :
Operator 1 – Ux
Operator 2 – Uy
Operator 3 – Uz
Operator 4 - norm U
<space> 2
Figure 14-9: Uy displacement contour combination 1

© 2019 ESI Group
NODES GROUP $C1$

CURVES CHOICE 4
List of operators :
Operator 1 – Ux
Operator 2 – Uy
Operator 3 – Uz
Operator 4 - norm U
<space> Ux
Figure 14-10: Ux displacement for all card 8 nodes

© 2019 ESI Group
CURVES CHOICE 1 2 3 4
List of operators :
Operator 1 – Ux
Operator 2 – Uy
Operator 3 – Uz
Operator 4 - norm U
<space> Ux
$rendering flat
Figure 14-11: Ux displacement for all nodes of cards 5 to 8

© 2019 ESI Group
NODES USER 1
CURVES CHOICE 1 2 3 4
List of operators :
Operator 1 – Ux
...
<space> Ux
Figure 14-12: Ux displacement on node 1 for cards 5 to 8
RETURN
CLOSE POST

© 2019 ESI Group
14.6 The Command CURVE POSTPROCESSING
14.6 THE COMMAND CURVE POSTPROCESSING

14.6.1 Introduction
The data held on the file POSTPROCESSING written by the routines POSTPROCESSING or
CROSS SECTION (LINE) may be plotted by means of the command CURVE
POSTPROCESSING. This command enables both the spatial variation and the variation with
change of loading to be plotted.
One set of results on the postprocessing file is characterized by:
l a set of points (nodes, centroids of elements, points uniformly spaced along a linear cross
section) ;
l several components of results defined at each of these points ;
l a set of linear combinations of load cases.
Thus, the variation of any given component of the results may be represented by two families of
curves as shown in figure 14.13:
Figure 14-13

© 2019 ESI Group
14.6.2 Input Data

The syntax of the command used to plot these curves is:
CURVE POSTPROCESSING GRID
GRID to draw a pattern of squares.

This command is followed by two types of command:
l SET to select the set of results to be processed and also the family of curves to be plotted,
l FORMAT to cause a drawing to be plotted and select the results to be shown.
In one call of the routine CURVE, several sets of results may be processed, and each command
SET is itself followed by one or more commands FORMAT. The command SET is of the
form :
T i (TYPE) n1 n2 .... (PROJECTION) (EPSI e)
Labels and values are as follows:

(TYPE) = the spatial variation is plotted.
POINTS
(TYPE) = the variation with respect to loading is plotted.
COMBINE
n1 n2 are the point or combination numbers selected.
In the absence of the label (TYPE), the spatial variation is plotted. If no list of values is given,
the routine takes by default all points or all combinations up to a maximum of 100.
For a plot of spatial variation, the independent variable is chosen by means of the label
(PROJECTION), as follows:
(PROJECTION) = X the x coordinate
= Y the y coordinate
= Z the z coordinate
= D distance measured along the cross section.
The default option is D.
(EPSI e) minimum amplitude (default = 10-6).
The command FORMAT is of the form :

© 2019 ESI Group
FORMAT Initialize the plotting. The FORMAT command optionally is followed

by a group of data defining a title of up to 60 characters in length.
Scales normally are calculated by the routine. However, the user may specify scales as follows :
XSCALE = lxspecifies the length of the x axis
YSCALE = ly or YMAX = y1, YMIN = y2
specify the length of the y axis, where y1 and y2 are maximum and minimum values used in the
calculation of scale.
Plot of spatial variation
COMBINE i j1 j2 ... jn
Components j1 ... jn of combination i are plotted.
COMPONENT i j1 j2 ... jn
Component i for combinations j1 j2 ... jn is plotted.
Plot of variation with loading
POINT i j1 j2 ... jn
Components j1 j2 ... jn at point i are plotted.
COMPONENT i j1 j2 ... jn
Component i for points j1 ... jn is plotted
Execution of the routine CURVE POSTPROCESSING is terminated by the command:
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
14.6.3 Example
CURVE POSTPROCESSING
SET 1
FORMAT COMPONENT 1 1 2 3 4 5
PLOT OF COMPONENT 1 FOR 5 COMBINATIONS
FORMAT PROJECTION X COMBINE 10 1 2 3

PLOT OF COMPONENTS 1 2 3 OF COMBINATION 10
SET 2 COMBINE 1 TO 20
FORMAT POINT 1 1 2 3
PLOT OF COMPONENTS 1 2 3 AT POINT 1
FORMAT COMPONENT 5 4 5 6 7
PLOT OF COMPONENT 5
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
14.7 The Command CURVE TRANSIENT
14.7 THE COMMAND CURVE TRANSIENT

The routine CURVE TRANSIENT is used to plot the variation of results with respect to time
or with respect to another component of results.
The input files required for the execution of this module are DATA and TRANSIENT. The
command CURVE TRANSIENT is of the form:
The parameters which may be included in this command are as follows:

GRID In order to draw a pattern of squares.
COMPLEX If results are of complex type (dynamic response to sinusoidal loading).
FREQUENCY Plots the text FREQUENCY on the X axis instead of TIME.
CIRCULAR Plots the text CIRC. FREQ. on the X axis instead of TIME.
frequency
The input data read by the routine consists of:
l one or several commands CARD (optional) which are used to select the numbers of the cards
taken into account.
l one or several commands FORMAT (optional) which specify the sizes and scales of the
drawings to be plotted.
This command can be followed by a title card.
l one or several commands NODE, ELEMENT or MEDIUM which are used to allow
selection of points and components of results.

This command also causes the plotting of one drawing (of a set of CURVES).
The command CARD (optional)
CARD c1 c2 ... cn
This command is followed by a list c1, c2 ....cn of cards to be selected. (Card number zero may
be selected).
For the post-processing of an harmonic calculation using the label COMPLEX, one must give
the result pair numbers (modulus-phase) to be selected.

© 2019 ESI Group
Ex : If a TRANSIENT file with the following structure :

CARD 1 modulus
CARD 2 phase
.
.
.
CARD 99 modulus
CARD 100 phase
write : CARD 1 TO 50.
These numbers must be in ascending order. The maximum number of selected cards is 500.
If this command is omitted, all the cards of the TRANSIENT file will be selected (except card
number zero).
The FORMAT command (optional)
FORMAT
title
The command FORMAT is optionally followed by a line of data defining a title of up to 60

characters (space in column 1).
If the command FORMAT is omitted (or if it is followed by no labels) :
l Scales will be calculated by the routine.
l No title will be added.
All the parameters of this command except the title remain active until the next FORMAT
command.
The NODE, ELEMENT or MEDIUM commands
LOGX Plots in logarithmic scale along the X axis.

LOGY Plots in logarithmic scale along the Y axis.
If a X or Y value is negative or zero, the decimal scale is used instead of the logarithmic scale.
The components of results and the points for which they are to be plotted are specified by one
or more commands NODE or ELEMENT if the type of result is FORCE, or MEDIUM if the
type of result is VALUE.

© 2019 ESI Group
The following parameters appear in these commands:

ni (i = 1,...n) List of nodes, elements or media.
(resuo) Type of result to be plotted as the ordinate.
(resuo) =
l DISPLACEMENT (nodes)
l VELOCITY (nodes)
l ACCELERATION (nodes)
l REACTION (nodes)
l FORCE (elements)
l VALUE (media)
This label is followed by a list rj (j = 1,...n) of components to be selected.
If no number is specified, 1 is taken by default (the first component of the
type of result selected will be plotted).
SUM If this label is present, the results plotted for each type of result
correspond to the sum on all selected nodes, elements or media. In the
axisymmetric mode, REACTION or PRESSURE type results are
multiplied by 2.
(compo) Selects in case of complex results the form of the component plotted as
ordinate :
(compo) =
l MODULUS
l PHASE
l REAL (modulus * cos(phase))
l IMAGINARY (modulus * sin(phase)).
ABSCISSA This label is necessary for plotting variation of results with respect to
another component of results.
All the parameters following the label ABSCISSA are relative to the component plotted as the
abscissa.
NODE, Indicates that the abscissa is relative to a node, element or medium.
ELEMENT or
MEDIUM
na Number of the node, element or medium selected for the abscissa.

© 2019 ESI Group
(resua) Type of result selected for the abscissa.

(resua) =
l DISPLACEMENT (node)
l VELOCITY (node)
l ACCELERATION (node)
l REACTION (node)
l FORCE (element)
l VALUE (medium)
ra Number of the component of the result selected for the abscissa.
(compa) Indicates in a case of complex results, the form of the component
selected for the abscissa.
(compa) =
l MODULUS (default)
l PHASE
l REAL (modulus * cos(phase))
l IMAGINARY (modulus * sin(phase)).
NORM Indicates that ordinates are to be normalized.
n Norm value.
After this command one or several curves will be plotted on the same drawing with respect to
the number of nodes (or elements or medium) and components selected.
For each node (or element or medium) there will be as many curves as selected components :
i.e If there are N nodes or elements selected and C components specified
there will be N x C curves plotted.
However, the maximum number of plotted curves is currently limited to 10.
The RETURN command
This command terminates the execution of the routine curve transient.
Note:
l The routine does not combine load cases. To access results for load cases other than the first, it is
necessary to add to the number of the required component the total number of components at a
point for all the preceding load cases.
For example, if it is desired to refer to the second component of displacement of load case 4 for
a structure for which there are 6 degrees of freedom per point, the number i which should
follow the label DISPLACEMENT is given by:
ri = 2 + 6 . 3 = 20

© 2019 ESI Group
Example
/12 3
/ o----o----o----o
/ 1 2 3 4
It is desired to plot the following curves:
Displacements as functions of time, for cards 5, 10, 15, 20, 25 and then stresses as functions of
displacement for all cards:
U2x / t
U4x / t
U4y / t
SIGMA(element2)force2 / U1x
SIGMA(element3)force2 / U1x

CURVE TRANSIENT
CARD 5 10 15 20 25
NODES 2 4 DISPLA 1 2
CARD
FORMAT
title.......
ELEMENT 2 3 FORCE 2ABSCISSA NODE 1 DISPLA 1
RETURN
6 curves will be drawn successively on screen and stored in the curve database.

© 2019 ESI Group
14.8 The Command CURVE FUNCTION
14.8 THE COMMAND CURVE FUNCTION

The routine CURVE FUNCTION is used to plot functions defined by tables in the DATA file.
The syntax of the command is as follows:
CURVE FUNCTION (GRID)
GRID in order to draw a pattern of squares.

The parameters required to define a drawing are specified in a FUNCTION command, as
follows:
FUNCTION i j ... XMIN = x1 XMAX = x2 NSTEP = n (LOG X) (LOG Y) --
(EPSI e) (NAPPE)
i j ... Are the numbers of the tables to be plotted (maximum 10).

x1 x2 Are the minimum and maximum values of the independent variable x.
n Is the number of subdivisions of the x axis.
LOG X = log/decimal scale plot on X axis
LOG Y = log/decimal scale plot on Y axis
If one of the X or Y set values is negative or zero, the log plot is abandoned, and replaced by a
decimal plot.
EPSI e = minimum amplitude (default = 10-6)

NAPPE = nappe of curves
This command may be repeated several times in one call of the routine CURVE FUNCTION,
execution of the routine being terminated by the command RETURN.
Notes:
l The FUNCTION command can be replaced by VELOCITIES, ACCELERATIONS or INTEGRAL
to plot respectively .
l The SPECTRAL label in a CURVE FUNCTION command is used to draw the values contained in
the SPECnf.DAT files generated by SPECTRAL GENERATION (see Chap.11.7.2).

© 2019 ESI Group
14.9 The Command CURVE SATURATION
14.9 THE COMMAND CURVE SATURATION

This command is used to plot magnetization curves for electromagnetism analyses (see
Electromagnetism Reference manual):
CURVE SATURATION
Display begins with the command:
SATU < liste> XMIN hmin XMAX hmax (NSTEP n) (TEMPERATURE <liste>)
Label list:
SATU < list > List of characteristics (positive or negative)

XMIN hmin Minimum value of magnetic field
XMAX hmax Maximum value of magnetic field
NSTEP n Number of calculation points
TEMPERATURE Temperature list (with THERMODEPENDANT)
< list >
NAPPE The curves are plotted under a nappe form
RETURN
ends the sequence.

© 2019 ESI Group
14.10 The Command CURVE TABULATION
14.10 THE COMMAND CURVE TABULATION

It may be necessary to draw curves defined point by point by the user, if, for example, the
values to be drawn cannot be obtained directly by postprocessing using SYSTUS or
SYSWELD.
The plotting procedure is called by the CURVE TABULATION command:
CURVE TABULATION
main title of the drawing
TABLE i XCOEF x YCOEF y TITLE title
x1 y1 x2 y2 ... xn yn or x1 y1 y'1 x2 y2 y'2 ... xn yn y'n
TABLE i…
.
.
.
LIMITS XMIN x1 XMAX x2 YMIN y1 YMAX y2
XHEADER label
YHEADER label
FORMAT
Under title of drawing
RETURN
Since all the points defining the curve to be drawn are given by the TABLE command, the
characteristics of the drawing for this curve are defined on the same line.
TABLE i i defines the type of curve to be drawn.
i = 1 the curve is defined linearly point by point by the pairs of values
(x, y).
i = 2 the curve is cubic; each point is defined by x, y and y'. There is no
limit on the number of lines.
XCOEF x Multiplier coefficient of abscissa
XCOEF y Multiplier coefficient of ordinates
TITLE title Is used to draw a legend to spot the curve.
(title: 12 characters maxi).
The limits of the drawing are given optionally; by default, these limits are determined
automatically. The values are to be indicated behind the XMIN, XMAX, YMIN and YMAX
labels of the LIMIT command. The identification of the X and Y axes can be done by the
XHEADER and YHEADER commands behind which an alphanumeric text can be added (12
characters maximum) which will be printed along the axes.
The FORMAT command produces the drawing. This command is following by one line for an
optional title.
The CURVE TABULATION procedure is terminated by the RETURN command.

© 2019 ESI Group
14.11 The Command CURVE AVERAGE
14.11 THE COMMAND CURVE AVERAGE

The routine CURVE AVERAGE is applicable only to the analysis of data held on a
POSTPROCESSING file created by the routine CROSS SECTION IMPOSED, where cross
sections have been defined by LINE commands.
For a specified component of results of a cross section, the program linearises, computes, prints
and plots the following data:
l The average value T ,
0
l The two differences between:
o the linearised inner surface value and the average value,
o the linearised outer surface value and the average value.
l The linear gradient ΔT1, which is the difference between the two linearised surface values,
l The non linear gradient ΔT2 computed and which corresponds to the maximum value of the
two non linear gradients obtained in surface.
|ΔTnl(-t/2)| et |ΔTnl(+t/2)| avec ΔTnl(u) = T(u) – [T0 + u/t . ΔT1]
ΔTnl(-t/2) = T(-t/2) – T0 + ½. ΔT1 et ΔTnl(t/2) = T(t/2) – T0 - ½. ΔT1
ΔT2 = MAX [ |ΔTnl(-t/2)| , |ΔTnl(+t/2)| , 0. ]
l The sum of the two linear and non linear gradients ΔT1 + ΔT2.
The plot of the 6 data is executed according the followings:
l Numbers of combination or loads for all POST PROCESSING files (POST, SECTION,
TAVER…),
l Time for all type SYSNUKE files (with the TIME label).
Note:
l The terms "inner surface" and "outer surface" designate respectively the points xi and xe defined in the
routine CROSS SECTION by the command LINE.
Input data
CURVE AVERAGE RCCM

COMBINE n1 to n2 STEP n3 COMPONENT j(EPSI e) TIME ASME FORMAT
plotting subtitle
SET i
RETURN

© 2019 ESI Group
CURVE Initiates execution of the routine.

AVERAGE
COMBINE n1 to Specifies which load case combinations are to be taken into account
n2 STEP n3 (limited to 2000 combinations).
COMPONENT j Indicates the number of the component of results to be considered.
EPSI e Minimum amplitude (default = 10-6).
TIME Plot according to time and not according to combination. In this case,
the time must be written in the combination title.
FORMAT Initialized the plotting.
This command is followed by a line of optional subtitles.
SET i specifies the number i of the set of results on the file
POSTPROCESSING to be plotted.
One set of results here corresponds to one cross section on the file
POSTPROCESSING.
RETURN Terminates execution of the routine.
The RCCM label on the CURVE AVERAGE command permits the ΔT2 computation using
the RCCM. The ΔT2 non linear gradient corresponds to the maximum value of:
ΔTnl(-t/2) = | T(-t/2) – T0 | - | ½. ΔT1 | et ΔTnl(+t/2) = | T(+t/2) – T0 | - | ½. ΔT1 |
ΔT2 = MAX [ ΔTnl(-t/2) , ΔTnl(+t/2) , 0. ]
The ASME label on the COMBINATION command is used to fix only the T0 average value
and the linearised inner (T0 - ½. ΔT1) and outer (T0 + ½. ΔT1) surface values.
Example of the T temperature in the substructure thickness
Definitions
T(u, t) Temperature in the thickness surface.
T0(t) Averaged temperature in the thickness surface.
ΔT1(t) Differences of linearised temperature between the inner and the outer
surface.
ΔTnl(u, t) Non-linear complement of the temperature .
ΔT2(t) Highest of both surface values of the non-linear complement of the
temperature in the thickness surface.

© 2019 ESI Group
Computation of the parameters characterizing the temperature distribution T(u) in the thickness
surface where u is the abscissa of the current point in the thickness defined according to the
middle of the surface.
l the averaged temperature.
l the difference of linearised temperature

between the inner and the outer surface.
l the non-linear complement of

temperature in the thickness surface.
l the highest of both values of the non-
linear complement of the temperature in
surface
Temperature distribution T(u) in the thickness surface t (ri = curvature radius in inner surface) :

© 2019 ESI Group
14.12 Specific Post-Processing for Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis
14.12 SPECIFIC POST-PROCESSING FOR NONLINEAR

DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
It is possible to create one or several POSTn.fdb files or POSTn.erfh5 files directly during a
transient nonlinear computation. This functionality is limited to results at nodes and at elements
centers. There is also a possibility to create a special DATASET: ACTIV.E which will be used
by Visual Viewer to hide automatically deactivated elements.
The results that will be stored in the .fdb file are listed in a resource file: post_tnl.par which can
be modified manually. The selection of the file follows the usual convention in SYSWORLD:
the computation directory has the priority.
The commands are:
Input data
TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR
…
POST (ERF) (FDB) FILE n1 (NEW) (STORE s) (GROUP $name$ or num) --
--(ONLY <dataset list>)
POST (ERF) (FDB) FILE n2 (NEW) (STORE s) (GROUP $name$ or num) --
--(ONLY < dataset list>)
…
RETURN
POST Activates the light post-processing. One or two exports (.erfh5 and/or .fdb)
are done by line beginning with the keyword POST. The number of these
lines is limited to 20.
ERF Optional. Will create an .erfh5 file: NameModel_POSTn.erfh5
FDB Optional. Will create an .fdb file: if the .erfh5 file has been created:
NameModel_MINIPOSTn.fdb, else NameModel_POSTn.fdb. If ERF and
FDB are missing, only the .fdb file named NameModel_POSTn.fdb will be
created.
FILE n Gives the POST file id.
NEW Will create a new POST file (note that if the file exists already, it will
be erased).
STORE s Gives the frequency of storage of results.
By default, the storage is done at each card.
If s=0 only the last card is stored.
GROUP $name$ Optional. Selection of part of the geometry by using group of elements or
or num nodes. By default, the complete geometry is selected.

© 2019 ESI Group
ONLY <dataset Optional. List of dataset to write into the post file. The names of the
list> dataset must be identical (with all characters) to those listed into the 3rd
column (NAME) of the post_tnl.par file (see hereafter).
By default, all possible datasets for current computation option are
written.
Example for stress datasets (for solid and shell elements), the selection
is done with the command: “ONLY STRESSES SHELL_SURF_
STRESSES”
The results stored by this command are described in a specific resource file which is described
hereafter.
Limitation:
l Group selection with .fdb file format is not supported with DMP computations.
post_tnl.par file
The objective of this file is to list the necessary data used for results extraction and storage. By
default, this file is located in the "ressources_fichiers" directory. The user can customize it and
position it in the working directory to use it.
Note that no restriction is given in this file, and consequently, it is of the responsibility of the
user to check the validity of it customization.
This capability is limited to results at nodes or at elements center.
The syntax is the following:
DOMAIN: (4 characters):
l MECA
l THER
l ELEC
l META
l ENTH
l HYDR
l DIPR
NAMEDTS (32 characters max):

Should use the standard syntax for DATASETS:
l “name”:N for nodes results
l “name”:E for results at element center
NAME (32 characters max):

This name will be displayed in the menus for Post- processing.
It must be unique per DOMAIN type.

© 2019 ESI Group
TYPEDTS (integer):
Specify the dimension of result.
l 1 :'Scalar '
l 2: 'Scalars'
l 3: 'Vector '
l 4:'Tensor '
FICRES (integer):
Specify the type of results
l 1: FORCES
l 2: REACTIONS
l 3: DISPLACEMENT (TEMPERATURE)
l 6: VELOCITIES
POSI (integer):
Specify the position in the crude results (in the SYSWROLD files). It is useful to select a
specific value in the FORCE file for example.
LONG (integer):
Specify the number of items read in the results files. For metallurgical phases, this value is
updated using SPECIAL (see afterwards).
LONDTS (integer):
Depends on the TYPEDTS. Generally, 1 for scalar, 3 for vector and 6 for symmetric tensor.
For metallurgical phases, this value is updated using SPECIAL (see afterwards).
SPECIAL (integer):
Specify some special cases.
l = 10 shells
l = 2 tensor
l = 3 metallurgy
l = 12 Stresses for 24xx shells
l = 13 metallurgy in shells
l = 20 generation of the DATASET ACTIV.E used for deactivated elements:
o Status of the element for activation/deactivation using the STATUS label has priority.
o Existence of material properties (the presence of the labels E, KX and MATE is tested).
o In the thermo-metallurgical options, if the element is composed mainly (more than 96%) of
phase 2 – which is the fictitious phase in Sysweld native database. To change the number
of the fictitious phase, it requires simply changing the value of POSI.

© 2019 ESI Group
IOPT:
Specify the computation options because results can be stored in different places depending on
2D or 3D options:
l 3: shells mechanical and shell-solid
l 4: three-dimensional mechanical
l 5: thermal and others
l 7: two-dimensional mechanical
DOMAINE NAMEDTS NAME TYPEDTS FICRES POSI LONG LONDTS SPECIAL IOPT
MECA D.N: DISPLACEMENTS 3 3 1 3 3 0 4
MECA ROTATION.N: ROTATIONS 3 3 4 3 3 0 3
MECA S.E: STRESSES 4 1 1 6 6 2 3
MECA E.E: STRAINS 4 1 7 6 6 2 4
MECA E.E: STRAINS 4 1 5 4 6 2 7
MECA S.E: SHELL_SURF_ 4 1 1 5 6 12 3
STRESSES
MECA ACTIV.E: ACTIVE 1 1 60 1 1 20 4
MECA ACTIV.E: ACTIVE 1 1 40 1 1 20 7
THER TEMP.N: TEMPERATURE 1 3 1 1 1 0 5
META TEMP.N: TEMPERATURE 1 3 1 1 1 0 5
META PHASES.E: PHASE_ 2 1 5 0 0 3 5
PROPORTIONS
META PHASES.E: PHASE_ 2 1 5 0 0 13 5
PROPORTIONS
META ACTIV.E: ACTIVE 1 1 6 1 1 20 5

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 15 TOPOLOGY OF ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 15 TOPOLOGY OF ELEMENTS

The numbers shown in the following sketches indicate the order in which the nodes of each
type of element are defined.
One dimensional elements
Two dimensional elements
Three dimensional elements

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 16 SYSTEMS OF AXES
16.1 Global Axes (X, Y, Z)

16.1 GLOBAL AXES (X, Y, Z)
The global axes are unique, and form the orthogonal trihedron with respect to which the
coordinates of nodes are defined. The directions in which rotations are considered positive are
shown in Figure 16-1: Global axes.
Figure 16-1: Global axes

© 2019 ESI Group
16.2 Local Axes (x, y, z)
16.2 LOCAL AXES (X, Y, Z)

The type of local axes associated with an element depends upon the dimension of the element,
and the dimension of the space in which it is located.
16.2.1 One-Dimensional Elements

The local x axis is tangent to the element, its orientation being determined by the manner in
which the nodes of the element are defined.
The orientations of the local y and z axes depend upon the dimension of the space in which the
element is located.
Two-dimensional Space
The y axis is obtained by rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise from the x axis. The local axes
of an element with two nodes are shown in Figure 16-2.
Figure 16-2
Three-Dimensional Space
The local z-axis is the intersection of a plane perpendicular to the element and passing through
the first node of the element, with a plane parallel to the global z axis and containing the
element. The orientation of the local z axis is such that it forms an acute angle with the global Z
axis.
The local y-axis is then chosen so that the three local axes form a right-handed Cartesian
system.
Figure 16-3 to Figure 16-5 show the local axes of a one-dimensional element in the general
case, and special cases in which the local x axis is parallel with the global Z-axis.

© 2019 ESI Group
Figure 16-3
Figure 16-4 Figure 16-5

Note:
l A beam is considered as parallel with Oz when it angle with Oz is lower than 0.001 radian. In this
case, the angle with Oz is not taken into account in it matrices and loads.

© 2019 ESI Group
16.2.2 Two-Dimensional Elements

Two-Dimensional Space
The local x and y axes are parallel with the global X and Y axes, as shown in Figure 16-6.
Figure 16-6
Three-Dimensional Space
New convention associated with new data structure
With the new data structure, three axes are associated with the finite element for all two-
dimensional elements in a three-dimensional space (Figure 16-7: Definition of GEOMETRIC,
LOCAL and MATERIAL axes):
l The GEOMETRIC or "isoparametric" axes linked to the geometry of element and in
particular to the numbering of nodes.

l The LOCAL or "elementary" axes which satisfy a global coherence between elements. For
example, the user may imposed on the axis "x" of the LOCAL axes of all elements to be
parallel to the plane XY of the GLOBAL or "general" axes.
l The MATERIAL axes in which the anisotropic material properties are defined (matrix of
elastic behavior, expansion coefficient...).

© 2019 ESI Group
Figure 16-7: Definition of GEOMETRIC, LOCAL and MATERIAL

axes
Definition of the GEOMETRIC axes
The computation of the GEOMETRIC axes is performed at the centre G of the element.
The axis z is along the normal whose orientation is given by the direction used to describe the
element.
(1)
and are the first two vectors of the local curvilinear base:
with
nn: number of element nodes

© 2019 ESI Group
: parametric coordinates
: vector of the node "i" coordinates
Ni: functions of the node "i" form
The axis x is given by the direction of the vector
The axis y is inferred from the previous two axes:
With a linear triangle, the axis xL is along the edge "12" of the element (Figure 16-7: Definition
of GEOMETRIC, LOCAL and MATERIAL axes).
Definition of the LOCAL axes
Unlike the GEOMETRIC axes the definition of the LOCAL axes permits to obtain an almost
continuous representation of the axes from one element to another. The definition of local
loads, privileged orientations due to anisotropy and interpretation of results of type FORCE is
thus made easier.
The LOCAL axe is defined in relation to GEOMETRIC axes by the angle (Figure 16-7:
Definition of GEOMETRIC, LOCAL and MATERIAL axes)
This angle can be defined by the user with the command ELEMENT under GEOMETRY
procedure (cf. 4.4) or under MODIFY CORRECT procedure (cf. 6.2.1) as follows:
ELEMENT
(number) / (list of nodes) FORM (value) PSI value
The computation of this angle can be performed automatically with the command DRAPING
under the MODIFY outside DEFINITION process (cf. 6.3).
The axis x L of the element then belongs to a plane parallel to the plane XY of the GLOBAL
axes:
corresponds to the third unit vector of the GLOBAL axes.

In the particular case where the normal to the element is parallel to , the axis xL is along the
axis X of the GLOBAL axes.

© 2019 ESI Group
The Figure 16-8 represents the angle defining the LOCAL axes of a triangle or quadrangle
element situated in the plane XY.
Figure 16-8: Representation of the LOCAL axes after draping in the

plane XY
Definition of the MATERIAL axes
The MATERIAL axes are defined in relation to the LOCAL axes by the angle (Figure 16-
7: Definition of GEOMETRIC, LOCAL and MATERIAL axes) :
This angle is defined by the label PSI under the command MATERIAL PROPERTIES of the
DEFINITION procedure (cf. 4.5 and 8.3).
Convention associated to old data structure
1) Shell element with three or four nodes
Small displacements
The local z-axis is perpendicular to the plane tangent to the element.
This axis is oriented so that the nodes of the element are defined in counter clockwise order as
viewed from a point in the positive z halfspace.
The x-axis lies in the tangent plane and is parallel to the OXY plane. The local y-axis also lies
in the tangent plane, perpendicular to the local x- axis and oriented so that the global Z
component of the local y base vector is positive (positive slope). The orientation of the local x
axis is chosen such that the local system is right-handed.

© 2019 ESI Group
Figures 16.8, 16.9 and 16.10 show the local axes of a triangular element in three-dimensional
space in the general case, and in the special cases in which the local and global z axes are
parallel.
Large displacements : (3 node shell in TRANSIENT NON LINEAR)

In this case the local axes follow the deformation of the element.
The local z-axis is perpendicular to the plane tangent to the element. This axis is oriented so that
the nodes of the element are defined in counter clockwise order as viewed from a point in the
positive z halfspace.
The x-axis belongs to the tangent plane of the element and is parallel to side 12.
The y-axis lies in the tangent plane and is normal to the x-axis.
The figure 16.11. represents the local axes of a 3 noded shell elements in a non linear analysis.
The unitary vectors of the local axes are defined as follows:
2) 2404, 2006 and 2008 shell elements or surface elements in option THREE-DIMENSIONAL
During post-processing (cf. Chapter 14) the software displays the isoparametric axes in the
centre of the element. The axes are determined by relations (1) and (2).
During alphanumeric post-processing (COMBINE COORDINATE AXES - cf. 13.3.2) the
sofware stores the isoparametric axes at each Gaussian point in the STRESS file. The axes are
also determined by relations (1) et (2). Local axes may be different from one integration point
to another in case of distorted elements.
For regular shaped elements, such as any triangle or a parallelogram with no more than eight
nodes and intermediate nodes located at middle of the sides, the local axes are the same over the
element:
l x parallel to first side,
l y parallel to last side.

© 2019 ESI Group
Figure 16-9
Figure 16-10 Figure 16-11

© 2019 ESI Group
Figure 16-12

© 2019 ESI Group
16.2.3 Three-Dimensional Elements

The local axes are parallel with the global axes.
Review: Inner product
The inner product of two vectors and is another vector , given by:
The vector is :
l perpendicular to the plane containing and
l has an orientation defined so that , , will be a counterclockwise trihedron.
l has a modulus given by :
where .
As a function of the components of vectors and , is defined as:

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 17 MATERIAL BEHAVIOR LAWS
17.1 Notations

17.1 NOTATIONS
General notations
a : Scalar
v : vector of components νi in base (ei)
ν = νi ei (with usual summation convention)
{v} : table containing components of vector v in a given base
<v> = {v}T : transpose of {v}
t : 2nd order tensor with components tij in base (ei)
δ : 2nd order unit tensor with components δij = 1 if i = j , otherwise 0 (δij
Kronecker's symbol)
t' : stress deviator of second order tensor t with components t'ij in base (ei)
tm : mean value of t
tVM : von Mises invariant of t
D : 4th order tensor with components Dijkl in base (ei)

[a] : matrix of components aij
[a]T : transpose of [a]
Basic operations
s=v.w : scalar product of vector v and w
s = vi wi (with usual summation convention)
s = < v > . { w } = { v }T . { w }
s=t:r : scalar product of tensors t and r
s = tij rij
c=axb : vector product of vectors a and b

© 2019 ESI Group
17.1 Notations
v ⊗w : tensor product of 2 vectors

v ⊗ w is the tensor of components vi wj
[ a ] = { v } . < w > = { v } . { w }T is the matrix containing the
components of v ⊗ w
a 2nd order tensor is written t = tij ei ⊗ ej
a 4th order tensor is written D = Dijkl ei ⊗ ej ⊗ ek ⊗ el
[ c ] = [ a ] . [ : matrix product of [ a ] by [ b ]
b] matrix [ c ] has components c = a b
ij ik kj
: partial derivative of a with respect to x
: partial derivative of the ith component of u with respect to the jth spatial
variable
: derivative of u with respect to time
Special notations
u : displacement vector
v : velocity vector
ε : linearized strain tensor
d : strain rate tensor
e : Green-Lagrange strain tensor
εe : elastic strain tensor

εp : plastic strain tensor
εc : viscoplastic (or creep) strain tensor
εth : thermal strain tensor
σ : Cauchy stress tensor
π : 2nd Piola Kirchhoff stress tensor
θ : temperature

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
17.2 ELASTICITY
17.2.1 General
Hooke's law is written:
Fourth order tensor D is designated the elasticity modulus tensor.

Given the symmetries between the stress tensor and strain tensor, and the existence of an elastic
potential, D is expressed on the basis of 21 independent constants in the most usual anisotropic
case.
For reasons of simplicity, Hooke's law is generally written in the following matrix form:
with, in the general 3-dimensional case:
Notes:
l Shear terms are doubled in table {ε}. We frequently have:
(with i ≠ j)
l For thermoelasticity, Hooke's law is written:
with

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
where ai represents the coefficient of expansion of the material in direction i .

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
17.2.2 Isotropic Linear Elasticity

In this case, elasticity modulus tensor D is expressed according to 2 independent constants:
l Young's modulus E ,
l Poisson's ratio ν .
Hooke's law is written:
or
where λ and μ are Lamé coefficients. μ is also noted G , and is referred to as the shear
modulus.
Matrix [D] is written as follows for the general 3-dimensional case:
For TWO-DIMENSIONAL problems, the matrix form of Hooke's law is written:
with,
For TRANSLATION structures (hypothesis of plane strain in plane ( e 1 , e 2 )) or

AXISYMMETRICAL structures:

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
and PLANE structures (hypothesis of plane stress in plane (e1, e2)) :
To activate this module for SYSTUS elements, it is merely necessary to inform the following
physical characteristics:
Ee
NU ν
LX LY LZ α (thermoelasticity)
For thermoelasticity, where the Young's modulus is temperature-dependent, value e < 0 must be
entered, with TABLE -e giving evolution of the Young's modulus with temperature. Likewise,
where the coefficient of expansion is temperature-dependant, enter α < 0, with TABLE - α
giving the coefficients of expansion according to temperature.
Note:
l For thermoelasticity, the coefficient of expansion taken into account at a given temperature θ , is
the mean coefficient of expansion between 0 and θ :
and in incremental form:

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
17.2.3 Anisotropic Linear Elasticity

In the most usual 3-dimensional case, elasticity modulus tensor D is expressed on the basis of
21 independent constants. In practice, matrix [D] is known in a special system of axes (system
linked to the material, and integrating eventual material symmetries). These data are entered in
SYSTUS via the material characteristics:
TABLE t
PSI Ψ THETA θ PHI φ
LX α1 LY α2 LZ α3 (thermoelasticity)
Table t then gives the components of matrix [D] in the material system of axes defined by Ψ, θ,
φ . The method used for introducing the components of [ D ] depends on the selected
computation option (see Chapter 8).
Notes:
l The material system of axes is used to introduce:
l components of [D],
l coefficients of expansion α i ,
l components of [G ] and {h } for elastoplastic computation with the TSAI criterion (see A3.3)
l For 3-dimensional orthotropic problems, [D] is written:
with ,
and where,
l represent the moduli in the 3 directions
l νij, is Poisson's ratio in direction j, deduced from a tensile load test in direction i

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
l Gij , is the shear modulus in plane i,j.

The Poisson's ratios and elasticity moduli are related by:
For TWO-DIMENSIONAL problems:
with,
For TRANSLATION structures (hypothesis of plane strain in plane ( e 1 , e 2 )) or

AXISYMMETRICAL structures:
and for PLANE structures (hypothesis of plane stress in plane (e1, e2)):
Note:
l For a plane strain, plane stress or axisymmetrical stress hypothesis to be valid in the presence of
an orthotropic solid, direction e 3 must coincide with an orthotropic direction.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
For an orthotropic solid with a transverse isotropic characteristic in plane (e1 , e2 ), matrix [D] is
obtained by writing:
For example, for a 3-dimensional case, we have:
with,

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
17.2.4 Non-Linear Elasticity

This corresponds to generalization of Hooke's law for isotropic media . Young's modulus is
assumed to be dependent on an equivalent strain, defined by:
and which coincides with the strain obtained by a unidirectional test.

To activate this model for SYSTUS elements, the E, NU and VARIABLE labels must be
informed in the physical characteristics of the elements:
E e
NU ν
VARIABLE t
LX LY LZ α (thermoelasticity)
TABLE t then describes the stress-strain law ( σ as a function of εeq ). This TABLE must be
type 1 (linear piecewise function) where the law is not temperature-dependent, or type 7 in
other cases:
TABLE
t / 1 0 0 ε1 σ1 ε2 σ2 ...
or
TABLE
t / 7 θ1 f1 θ2 f2 θ3 f3 ...
f1 / 1 0 0 ε1 σ1 ε2 σ2 . . .
f2 / 1 ...
...
Tables fi describe the stress-strain laws for each temperature θi. These tables must be type 1.
Label E = e defines the Young's modulus value corresponding to zero strain.
The stress-strain law can be deduced directly from a single axis test, based on the values
recorded for force F and displacement u :
l small displacements and small strains:
where S0 and l0 represent test piece section and initial length respectively.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
l large displacements (total Lagrangian formulation):
l large displacements and large strains (updated Lagrangian formulation and modified updated
Lagrangian formulation):

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity
RECAPITULATION

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity

© 2019 ESI Group
17.2 Elasticity

© 2019 ESI Group
17.3 Elastoplasticity
17.3 ELASTOPLASTICITY
A number of plasticity criteria and models are available:
l von Mises, Drucker, Stassi, Tsai-Hill and user-programmable criteria,
l perfect plasticity model, and plasticity models with isotropic, kinematic or combined strain-
hardening in the case of the von Mises criterion,

l plasticity models interacting with ductile damage (germination, growth, and coalescence of
cavities).
l special plasticity model can also be programmed by the user (see Chapter 17.7).

© 2019 ESI Group
17.3.1 Theory
Hypotheses and principles
Experience shows that there is a convex domain in stress space, referred to as the elasticity
domain, such that any load path inside this domain only generates elastic strains. This domain
is defined on the basis of scalar value function F , referred to as yield function or plasticity
criterion :
If a stress state, assumed to be elastic, reaches the frontier of this domain, plastic strains then
occur in such a way that the stress state verifies the following condition:
The above equation defines the yield surface in the stress space.
Total strain is split (hypothesis of total strain partition) into:
l thermal strain,
l elastic strain,
l plastic strain.
or, in an incremental form:
The existence of a plastic potential (Hill's principle of maximum plastic work) leads to
formulation of a hypothesis of normality , so that we can write:
for the plasticity associated with criterion F = 0.

A general elastoplasticity law, between two successive times t and t+ Δt, is written:

© 2019 ESI Group
Yield function
We put:
with mean stress:
and von Mises function (or equivalent stress):
Von Mises criterion

The von Mises criterion is particularly suitable for metal material behavior problems
where k is yield stress.

The von Mises yield surface is represented, in the main stress space, by a cylinder having the
trisector of the trihedral as its axis, and as its radius:
The orthogonal plane to the trisector in the main stress space, is referred to as the stress deviator
plane.
Materials which follow the von Mises criterion meet the condition:
This means that plastic strain does not generate any change in volume. We therefore have:

© 2019 ESI Group
Drucker-Prager criterion
This criterion is used to model the elastoplastic behavior of soils and corresponds to an
approximation of the MOHR-COULOMB criterion.
Two types of Drucker-Prager criterion are available:
l either the Drucker criterion yield surface coincides with the outer vertices of the MOHR-
COULOMB criterion yield surface in the stress deviator plane.

l or the yield surface coincides with the internal vertices of the MOHR-COULOMB criterion
yield surface.
The yield function is expressed as follows:
or
Material constants α and k are related to cohesion c and the angle of friction by:
if the yield surface coincides with the external vertices of the MOHR- COULOMB yield
surface, or
if the yield surface coincides with the internal vertices of the MOHR- COULOMB yield
surface.

© 2019 ESI Group
Stassi criterion
This criterion is adapted for the elastoplastic behavior of concrete:
or
Material constants α and k have the dimension of a stress, and are related to tensile and
compressive yield stresses Rt , and Rc by:
α = (1/3) . ( Rc - Rt)
k2 = (1/3) . Rc . Rt
where Rc and Rt are positive values.
Tsai-Hill criterion
The Tsai criterion is used to model the elastoplastic behavior of anisotropic materials:
The Hill criterion corresponds to hij = 0.

The criterion is written in matrix form as follows:
where {σ} designates the vector notation of the stress tensor.

In the THREE-DIMENSIONAL case:

© 2019 ESI Group
and in the TWO-DIMENSIONAL case:
[G] and {h} contain the constants of the criterion. [G] is a symmetrical square matrix, with a
dimension of 4 x 4 (two-dimensional) or 6 x 6 (three-dimensional). { h } is a vector with a
dimension of 4 (two-dimensional) or 6 (three-dimensional).
For an orthotropic solid , taking as the yield stresses observed under tensile and
compressive load respectively or unidirectional tests in direction ei and X ij (with i ≠ j ) as the
yield stresses observed for shear tests, matrix [G] and {h} are written :
Bi-directional tests are required for characterization of the G ij coefficients. Tsai-Hill proposes:
User criterion
The user can program a plasticity criterion which is a function of the first two stress tensor
invariants. The yield function of the criterion must then take the following general form:
or
Criterion programming rules are defined in Chapter 17.3.2

© 2019 ESI Group
Strain-hardening
In practice, the elasticity domain evolves in the presence of a plastic strain. This phenomenon is
referred to as the strain-hardening of the material. The plasticity criterion then depends on other
internal variables of the material:
A distinction is normally made between two types of strain-hardening:

l isotropic strain-hardening, which corresponds to "expansion" of the elasticity domain
“Expansion” of the elasticity domain is governed, in the case of the von Mises criterion, by the
internal scalar variable , corresponding to total equivalent plastic strain:
l kinematic strain-hardening, which corresponds to displacement of the elasticity domain in the

stress space

© 2019 ESI Group
Displacement of the elasticity domain in the stress space is represented by internal tensor
variable with components .
Kinematic strain-hardening models can be used to represent the Baushinger effect (anisotropic
behavior under tensile and compressive loads), and are consequently recommended for cyclic
applications.
The two types of strain-hardening can be combined (combined strain-hardening).
Combined strain-hardening models can be used to reproduce the cyclic hardening or softening
phenomena observed in certain materials.
A number of strain-hardening models are available:
l isotropic strain-hardening model
with
l PRAGER linear kinematic strain-hardening model

© 2019 ESI Group
Scalar c represents the scale-hardening slope. This slope can be temperature-dependent, and in
certain cases can also depend on total equivalent plastic strain :
The kinematic variable evolution law is then written:
l non-linear kinematic strain-hardening model

In this case, the kinematic strain-hardening variable follows the Armstrong - Frederick law:
This model can be used for effective reproduction of cyclically stabilized material curves. This
model can also be used to reproduce the "ratchet" effect.
l combined (isotropic + kinematic) strain-hardening model

© 2019 ESI Group
17.3.2 User-Programmed Criterion

The user must program his plasticity criterion in FORTRAN, using the USCRIT subroutine.
The real variables used must be declared in double precision.
The function of this subroutine is to define the literal expression of the following:
l yield function F as a function σm, and σVM
l its first derivatives with respect to σm, and σVM
l its second derivatives with respect to σm, and σVM
The subroutine must have the following arguments:
SUBROUTINE USCRIT (X, Y, SIGLM, FF, FX, FY, FXX, FYY, FXY, IST).
Description of arguments:

© 2019 ESI Group
Example : to program the following plasticity criterion:
using mean stress sm and von Mises stress σVM :
where
α = 0.16496 (non-dimensional constant)
β = 0.05 MPa-1
k = 1,7143 MPa
The corresponding USCRIT source program is given below:

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group
17.3.3 Description of Models and Input Data

Elastoplastic Models
A number of plasticity criteria and elastoplastic behavior models are available with SYSTUS.
These are defined by the following properties, in addition to the elastic properties described in
paragraph A3.2:
MODEL Plasticity model
CRITERION Plasticity criterion
Definition of the constants of the criterion (other than von
PLASTICITY
Mises)
YIELD Yield stress (von Mises criterion)
SLOPE Strain-hardening curve slope (von Mises criterion)
Isotropic proportion in the case of combined strain-
PISOTROPE
hardening (kinematic and isotropic)
DUCTILITY Special label used to define ductility characteristics
Parameter used to introduce a yield stress variation
DYNAM
according to strain rate, with the von Mises criterion.
Drucker, Stassi, Tsai-Hill and user-programmed criteria are only available for perfect plasticity
problems.
Perfect plasticity (MODEL = 1)
von Mises criterion
The unidirectional stress-strain curve takes the following form:
The user must specify:

MODEL 1
CRITERION 1 (default value)
YIELD k
DYNAM -d (dynamic effect on yield stress)
SLOPE 0

© 2019 ESI Group
The DYNAM label is used to introduce a dependency of yield stress upon total strain rate
(deduced thermal strain):
Table d gives function f. Where function f depends both on total strain rate and temperature,
this table must be type 7, with provision for definition of function f at different temperatures by
means of type 1 tables:
Notes:
l Where yield stress is temperature-dependent, the user must specify:
l YIELD = -m (with m a positive integer)
l SLOPE = 0
l Table m defines yield stress as a function of temperature.
Drucker-Prager criterion
CRITERION 2 or 3

PLASTICITY n
CRITERION = 2
If the yield surface coincides with the external vertices of the MOHR-COULOMB criterion
yield surface.
CRITERION = 3
If the yield surface coincides with the internal vertices of the MOHR-COULOMB criterion
yield surface.
PLASTICITY = n
Refers to table n defining cohesion c, and angle of friction ϕ (in degrees).
TABLE
n / c ϕ

© 2019 ESI Group
Stassi criterion
CRITERION 4
PLASTICITY n
PLASTICITY = n
refers to table n defining tensile and compressive yield stresses Rt, Rc (positive values) for the
material.
TABLE
n / Rt Rc
Tsai-Hill criterion
The user must specify
CRITERION 11
PLASTICITY n
PSI = Ψ THETA = θ PHI = φ
PLASTICITY = n
refers to table n defining the yield function constants in the order given below.
For THREE-DIMENSIONAL options:
TABLE
n / G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G33 - -
- - G34 G35 G36 G44 G45 G46 G55 G56 G66 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6
for TWO-DIMENSIONAL options
TABLE
n / G11 G12 G13 G14 G22 G23 G24 G33 G34 --
--G44 H1 H2 H3 H4
Where Ψ , θ and φ define the system of axes of the material (see17.2.3: anisotropic elasticity).
User-programmed criterion
CRITERION 6

© 2019 ESI Group
Plasticity (von Mises criterion) with isotropic strain-hardening (MODEL= 3 )

The uniaxial stress-strain curve takes the following general form:
MODEL 3
YIELD k
SLOPE p
Notes:
l Where yield stress is temperature-dependent, the user must specify:
YIELD = - m
Table m defines yield stress as a function of temperature.
l The slope value must not be confused with in the above figure:
l Where the strain-hardening slope depends on plastic strain (but not on temperature), the user must
specify:
SLOPE = -p (p > 0)
Table p defines uniaxial stress as a function of uniaxial plastic strain. This table must be type 1.
TABLE
p / 1 0 k σ2 σ3 ...
l The first point entered in the table must correspond to a zero plastic strain value. The
corresponding stress value is equal to yield stress k.
l Where the Young's modulus is independent from temperature, the program also allows direct entry
of the unidirectional stress - total strain law. In this case, a type 1 table must be used. The first
couple (σ1, ε1) is strictly obliged to verify the σ1 = E ε1, E being the Young's modulus of the
material given under the MATERIAL PROPERTIES command.

© 2019 ESI Group
TABLE
p / 1 ε1 σ1 ε2 σ2 ...
The program automatically recognizes the type of description used for the stress-strain law,
from the first pair of values entered for the table.
l Where the strain-hardening slope also depends on temperature (see figure below):
we must specify:
SLOPE = -p
Table p is then a type 7 table, from which the number of the necessarily type 1 table defining
the strain-hardening law (unidirectional stress - unidirectional plastic strain) at temperature θi is
read for each temperature θi :
TABLE
p / 7 θ1 f1 θ2 f2 ...
f1 / 1 0 k(θ1) σ2 σ3 ...
f2 / 1 0 k(θ2) ...
Definition of the strain-hardening tables at the different temperatures must comply with the
following rules:
l the unidirectional stress must be given as a function of plastic strain, and cannot be given as a
function of total strain as for case 3.

l the abscissa series (plastic strains) must be the same for all strain-hardening tables defined.
In this case, yield stress as a function of temperature must be defined in a special table, for the
same temperatures θi as before.

© 2019 ESI Group
Example :
Plasticity (von Mises criterion) with kinematic strain-hardening RAMBERG-OSGOOD

strain-hardening law (MODEL = 7)
For this model, the stress-strain curve can be written in the form:
where k, K and n can be temperature-dependent.

MODEL 7
YIELD k
SLOPE -p (p : is a positive integer)
TABLE
p / K n
Notes:
l If yield stress k is temperature-dependent, the user must specify:
YIELD-m
table m defines yield stress k as a function of temperature.
l K and/or n can be temperature dependent. The user must then specify:

© 2019 ESI Group
YIELD k
SLOPE -p
TABLE
p / -i -j (i,j are positive integers)
i / ...
j / ...
Table i defines K , and table j defines n , according to temperature.

Plasticity (von Mises criterion) with isotropic strain-hardening and sensitivity to load
rapidity - Johnson – Cook law (MODEL=7)
For this model, the stress-strain curve can depends on the load rapidity and the temperature. In a
single axis case, the stress σ can be written in the form:
with
In the expressions described before, is a strain rate without dimension with ,

and represents respectively the fusion temperature, the ambient temperature and
the media temperature.
When the strain velocity , the criteria can be written .

The model is made up of 5 parameters : et m.
The user must necessary specify:
MODEL 7
YIELD A
SLOPE-p (p is a positive integer)
TABLE
p / B n C m

© 2019 ESI Group
Plasticity (von Mises criterion) with Prager kinematic strain-hardening (MODEL=2)

The uniaxial stress-strain curve takes the following general form:
The kinematic variable is proportional to the plastic strain.
MODEL 2
YIELD k
SLOPE -p
Input data for YIELD and SLOPE labels as described in paragraph 17.3.3.1.2.
The slope p can depends on the temperature and the plastic strain. However the kinematic strain
hardening model can't take into account a highly non linear strain hardening in the case of
repeated or cyclic loads.
For such conditions of loads, the using of this model with a strain hardening slope beyond the
combination equivalent plastic strain or the using of Armstrong-Frederic's non linear kinematic
strain hardening Model is particularly advised.

© 2019 ESI Group
Plasticity (von Mises criterion) with kinematic strain-hardening - RAMBERG-OSGOOD

strain-hardening law (MODEL = 6)
MODEL 6
YIELD k
SLOPE -p (p : is a positive integer)
Same inpout data for LIMIT and YIELD labels as for Model 6 (described in paragraph 17.3.3.
In the presence of cyclic loads, the non linear kinematic strain hardening Model of Armstrong-
Frederic is recommended.
Non-linear kinematic strain-hardening - Armstrong - Frederick (MODEL = 8)
This model is particularly suitable for cyclic loads modelisation. It can be used for the
following:
l to reproduce the unsymmetry of behavior in tensile-compressive load after a first tensile
(Baushinger effect) through a non linear kinematric strain hardening law.

l identification of "ratchet" phenomena which appear in certain materials when subjected to
unsymmetrical stress cycles:
The plasticity criterion is written:
where k represents yield stress and the kinematic strain-hardening variable.

© 2019 ESI Group
The more straight forward model is used to integer a kinematic variable which the evolution law
is given by:
where is the equivalent plastic strain rate.

This model is made up of 2 parameters (c et γ) in addition to the yield stress (k). In a single axis
tensile-compressive case, the law here before can be integer to give :
First tensile :
Compression :
where et represents respectively the plastic strain and the strain hardening affected at the
end of the first tensile.
The obtained curve is given ( ) by the figure here after.
For a cyclic loading with imposed stresses (between and ), the "ratchet" strain is given
by:
The strain hardening parameters c and γ can be temperature- dependent. In this case, the
evolution law of the strain hardening variable is slighty modified to take the form hereafter:
aith
In the case of the material behavior must be caracterised on interval of important plastic strain, 2
linear kinematic variables must be considered. Then :

© 2019 ESI Group
The model uses 4 parameters, which are eventually temperature-dependent, in addition to the
yield stress dependency. This option is offen used by combination of a non-linear kinematic
variable ( ) and a variable obeying to the Prager law( ). An example
of tensile-compressive curve (reproduced with 2 kinematic variables) is given below:
The YIELD and SLOPE labels are used for data input:
MODEL8
YIELD l defines the yield stress
SLOPE h sets coefficients in the kinematic strain hardening law..
The YIELD label defines the yield stress k.

*If l ≥ 0, the yield stress is constant, independent of temperature
*If l < 0, then TABLE i = -l defines the yield stress. This table is:
TABLE
i / (model) (parameters)

© 2019 ESI Group
To introduce a yield stress temperature dependent, model = 1 must be entered:
TABLE
i / 1 - m
The TABLE with number m gives the yield stress as a function of temperature.
Note:
l The yield stres can also be dependent on the strain rate with the DYNAM label.
The SLOPE label defines the strain hardening law.
* h > 0,
linear kinematic variable (Prager) taken into account
where h represents the strain hardening slope, assumed to be constant and temperature-
dependent.
*h < 0,
then TABLE j = -h gives the coefficients of the non-linear kinematic strain hardening. Up to 2
kinematic variables can be used:
TABLE
j / nc, c1, γ1, c2, γ2,
nc: number of kinematic variables (nc = 1 ou 2).

c1 , γ1, c2, γ2, aα, b and αR can be temperature-dependent. In this case they are entered with a
negative value. The absolute integer value of each parameter then gives the number of a
TABLE defining the temperature-related evolution of the parameter concerned.

© 2019 ESI Group
Plasticity with combined strain hardening - isotropic strain hardening and PRAGER
kinematic strain hardening (MODEL=11. )
The user must specify the same parameters as for MODEL 2 or 3, with an additional parameter
defining the isotropic strain-hardening rate:
MODEL 11
PISOTROPE = Pisot (0 < Pisot < 1)
Plasticity with combined strain hardening and RAMBERG-OSGOOD strain hardening

law (MODEL = 12)
The user must define the same parameters as those used for MODEL 6 or 7, with an additional
parameter defining the isotropic strain-hardening rate:
MODEL 12
PISOTROPE = Pisot (0 < Pisot < 1)
Cyclic plasticity -von Mises criterion, EISENBERG model (MODEL = 5) )

The notion of half load cycle is incorporated in this model. A half cycle change occurs between
two plasticity states n and m, when:
Figure 17-1: loads in the stress deviator plane

© 2019 ESI Group
In Figure 17-2 above, a half cycle change occurs during load path 3, but not during load path 1
or 2.
O1 O2 1st half cycle (loading)

O2 O3 2nd half cycle
O3 O4 3rd half cycle
O3 ε3 σ3 coordinate system associated with 3rd half cycle
Figure 17-2 : half cycle concept on unidirectional stress-strain curve
(applied strain between - ∆ε and + ∆ε).
The unidirectional stress-strain curve for half cycle m is expressed in the coordinate system
associated with this half cycle (Figure 2), in the form:
This law is represented by path O3 B3 O4 in Figure 17-2.

In reality, the model introduces strain d (Figure 17-2), and defines yield stress at δ %.
The corrected unidirectional law then follows path O3 A3 B3 O4

σ = E ε if σ ≤ 2 σo
Related to the law:
σ = Km (εp)nm if σ ≥ 2 σo

© 2019 ESI Group
K m and n m are functions of total equivalent plastic strain obtained at the end of the preceding
half cycle ( ):
where Ko , no , Kα , nα , ξ, η, λ and μ are constants of the material.

Ko and no are deduced from the monotonic unidirectional stress-strain curve for the material.
The other constants are determined by identification with the experimental σ and ε results
obtained on the fatigue test piece:
Kα and nα, are calculated using the stabilized cycle, and ξ, η, λ and μ are calculated by
analyzing one or more intermediate half cycles.
YIELD σo
SLOPE -p (p is a positive integer)
TABLE
p / Ko no Kα nα ξ, η, λ μ
Notes:
l This model must only be used for proportional loads (constant stress tensor principal directions).
l Kα and nα can depend on cycle amplitude (2 ∆ε in Figure 17-2).
In table p, Kα (or nα) is then negative (-q for example), and table q defines Kα (or nα) according
to the amplitude of the greater half cycle, namely according to equivalent unidirectional strain for
the greater half cycle (defined in the coordinate system associated with the half cycle).
l A simplified application of the model involves positioning directly on the stabilized cycle, without
simulating all intermediate cycles. Table p is then used to define the first 4 constants only. Ko, and
no are obtained by identification with the cyclic strain-hardening law for the material. Kα, and nα
are determined as before.
Value σo is not updated in this case, and is still defined by YIELD = σo

© 2019 ESI Group
Cyclic plasticity - Chaboche-Marquis model (MODEL = 8)

This model is particularly suitable for cyclic problems. It can be used for the following:
l correct reproduction of the cyclically stabilized curves for the material (non-linear kinematic
strain-hardening),
l simulation of cyclic hardening or softening phenomena (isotropic strain-hardening),

l identification of "ratchet" phenomena which appear in certain materials when subjected to
unsymmetrical stress cycles:
The plasticity criterion is written:
where k represents yield stress, R the isotropic strain-hardening variable, and the kinematic
strain-hardening variable.

© 2019 ESI Group
The YIELD and SLOPE labels are used for data input:
sets isotropic strain-hardening data (yield stress and
YIELD l
strain-hardening law).
SLOPE h sets coefficients in the kinematic strain-hardening law.
a) Kinematic strain-hardening
l if h = 0, kinematic strain-hardening not considered.
l if h > 0, linear kinematic variable (Prager) taken into account:
where h represents the strain hardening slope, assumed to be constant.

l If h < 0, then TABLE j = -h defines the coefficients of the non-linear kinematic strain-
hardening law. Up to 2 kinematic variables can be introduced:
The γi coefficients can be made dependent on total equivalent plastic strain by:
or yield stress k and isotropic strain hardening variable R by:
TABLE
j / nc, c1, γ1, c2, γ2, aα, b, αR
nc: number of kinematic variables (nc = 0,1 or 2).

c1 , γ1 , c2, γ2 , aα, b and αR can be temperature-dependent. In this case they are entered with a
negative value. The absolute integer value of each parameter then gives the number of a
TABLE defining the temperature-related evolution of the parameter concerned.

© 2019 ESI Group
The following convention is used, where applicable, for the law covering evolution of gi with
plastic strain or isotropic strain hardening:
l If α
R = 0 with aα ≠ 1 and b ≠ 0, then the γi coefficients follow the law:
l If αR ≠ 0, then evolution of γi coefficients is given by :
l Otherwise, the γi coefficients are independent from total equivalent plastic strain and
isotropic strain hardening.
Notes:
l The following data are sufficient to integrate a single kinematic strain hardening variable with no
special additional effect.
SLOPE = -j
TABLE
j / 1 c1 γ1
l The evolution laws for γi coefficients are only significant if we also consider isotropic strain
hardening (combined strain hardening).
l Coefficient b in the equation
l is the same as that included in the isotropic strain hardening law (see paragraph below):
l If creep model 21 (see 17.4) is also applied to the plastic model (viscoplasticity), coefficient αR of
the evolution law for the γi coefficients is the same as that appearing in the viscoplastic law
(where αK ≠ 0 ).
b/ isotropic strain hardening data
The YIELD label relates to quantity k + R , appearing in the plasticity criterion formulation,
referred to below as the "plasticity threshold".
l If l ≥ 0, the plasticity threshold is constant, namely independent of both temperature and
plastic strain, and consequently equal to yield stress k .

l If l < 0, then TABLE i = -l defines the plasticity threshold.
TABLE
i / (model) (parameters)

© 2019 ESI Group
l If model = 0 :
then:
TABLE
i / 0 k
The only parameter required is yield stress k (the plasticity threshold is assumed to be
independent of temperature and plastic strain, as for YIELD = k, with k ≥ 0).
l If model = 1 :
then:
TABLE
i / 1 -m
The only parameter is the negative integer (- m). In this case it is necessary to introduce a new
TABLE, with number m, giving the plasticity threshold (identical to yield stress in this case)
as a function of temperature only.
l If model = 2 :
the plasticity threshold depends only on total equivalent plastic strain.
TABLE
i / 2 -n
n > 0 is the number of a TABLE defining the law for evolution of l = k + R with total
equivalent plastic strain.
l If model = 3 :
isotropic strain hardening R is defined by the following expressions (JL. Chaboche):
where Q represents the isotropic strain hardening saturated value.

This isotropic model can be used to reproduce cyclic hardening or softening phenomena which
appear in certain materials.
Cyclically stabilized curves for materials depend in practice on cyclic strain amplitude. A
hardening memory must be introduced to reproduce this effect numerically. Q then becomes a
function of parameter q, which memorizes the half amplitude of plastic strain variation round
the mean plastic strain value, in the following form:

© 2019 ESI Group
Variable q is introduced by means of a yield surface in the plastic strain space:
Function G also introduces tensile variable ξ which memorizes mean plastic strain.
Evolution laws for q and ξ are as follows:
with
η is a parameter of the material reflecting memorization kinetics. η = 0.5 corresponds to

instantaneous memorization (as from the first cycle).
Input data for this isotropic strain hardening model is as follows:
TABLE
i / 3 k b Q0 QM β η
Parameters k, b, Q 0 , Q M , β and η can be temperature-dependent, applying the normal

SYSTUS rules (negative value for the parameter, and a TABLE defining evolution of the
parameter with temperature, and taking the opposite number to the value introduced).
If η = 0, the memory parameters (q , etc.) do not evolve.
If β = 0 or Q M = Q 0 , the memory parameters (q, etc.) can evolve (if η > 0), but without effect
on (q) = cte = Q0.
Note:
l If only k, b and Q0 are given, no hardening memory effect is taken into account:

© 2019 ESI Group
Plasticity with ductile damage - ROUSSELIER model (MODEL = 4 )

Ductile damage is simulated locally in each element, and is integrated in the behavior law.
Ductile damage corresponds to cavity growth phenomena, which appear following an inclusion
decohesion phase. This model only integrates the cavity growth phase.
A damage term appears in the criterion formulation:
: isotropic strain-hardening law

The ductility of the material is characterized by mechanical constants D, and σ 1 and
metallurgical constant fo, which designates the initial solid fraction of the cavities (or
inclusions).
β is the internal damage variable:
which sets cavity solid fraction f :
where ρ represents the density ratio with respect to the undamaged state:
MODEL 4
YIELD k
SLOPE p (or -p)
RHO n
Values k or p have the same meaning as for model 2.

Label RHO refers to a table defining physical constants σ1, D and f0 .
TABLE
n / 1 σ1, D f0

© 2019 ESI Group
Ductile damage model with kinematic strain-hardening - Leblond – Perrin model

(MODEL = 9)
As for the Rousselier model, ductile damage simulation is done locally in each element. The
damage is integrated in the behavior law.
The model integrates the 3 phases of ductile damage:
l cavity germination phase:
o decohesion of inclusions from the criterion:
where σ I represents the largest principal stress, k yield stress and α and σ c the decohesion
parameters,
l or continuous germination,
l cavity growth phase, based on Gurson's plasticity criterion, generalized to take account of
kinematic strain hardening phenomena:
l coalescence phase, leading to fracture of the material.

In the plasticity criterion formulation, q represents the effects of interaction between the cavities
(Tvergaard parameter), and f* is a function of porosity f (solid fraction of void) introduced by
Tvergaard and Needleman to take account of coalescence effects on fracture:
where fc is the critical solid fraction on coalescence, and δ is a cavity growth accelerating
factor.
Evolution of porosity f is calculated from an initial value f 0 , and the mass conservation
equation which is written:
with

© 2019 ESI Group
k represents the yield stress of the material, and the kinematic strain hardening variable.
is a function of total equivalent plastic strain and mean plastic strain:
Evolution of with total equivalent plastic strain and mean plastic strain, is determined from
the behavior law for the sound material (undamaged), and is given in an auxiliary file (file
DUCTILITY.DAT see below).
To activate this model, the user must specify:
MODEL 9
YIELD k
MATERIAL m
DUCTILITY -n
SLOPE -p
The YIELD label defines the yield stress of the material. This yield stress can be temperature-
dependent, using the normal convention for the program (negative value to refer to a table).
The MATERIAL label is used to read tables defining strain hardening in file
DUCTILITY.DAT (by default). This file can contain a number of materials. m refers to the
material in question. The name of this file can be modified. In that case, its name must appear
on BEHAVIOUR PLASTIC card (of the TRANSIENT NON LINEAR procedure) following
the FILE label.
The DUCTILITY label refers to a table containing the damage characteristics of the material:
TABLE
n / q fo fc δ a σc α
The SLOPE label refers to a table defining the strain hardening law of the sound material
(undamaged).

© 2019 ESI Group
This table must be type 1 or 7:
TABLE
p / 1 0 k σ2 σ3 ....
or
p / 7 θ1 f1 θ2 f2 ....
f1 / 1 0 k(θ1) σ2 σ3 ....
f2 / 1 ....
The SLOPE label is only necessary to create the DUCTILITY.DAT file using the
CARACTERISATION DUCTILITY procedure (see below)
Creation of DUCTILITY.DAT file
The DUCTILITY.DAT file containing hardening data of the material is created by the
following procedure:
CARACTERISATION DUCTILITY
FILE<name>
MATERIAL m
PARAMETERS TRIAXIALITIES ntriax EPSP nepsp
MATERIAL m'
PARAMETERS ...
...
RETURN
The input data of the procedure are the problem data. The FILE command defines the output
file name containing hardening data. This file name must be renamed DUCTILITY.DAT in
order to be used.
The MATERIAL command defines the material number to be processed. This material will be
identified by the same number in the output file.
The PARAMETERS command defines the number of (TRIAXIALITIES label) and
(EPSP label) values to be considered. ntriax is limited to 10 and nepsp to 50. By default ntriax
= 10 and nepsp = 50.
Warning: the output file content (DUCTILITY.DAT) depends on the model used (MODEL
= 9, 10 or 13).
Ductile damage model with isotropic strain hardening - Leblond - Perrin model
(MODEL = 10)
The characteristics of this model are the same as for model 9. Strain hardening of the material is
integrated in isotropic, instead of kinematic form. Only the plasticity criterion is different:

© 2019 ESI Group
σ 1 and σ 2 are strain hardening parameters for the material, relating respectively to the von
Mises equivalent stress and mean stress. σ 1 and σ 2 are functions of total equivalent plastic
strain and mean plastic strain:
Functions σ 1 and σ 2 are determined from the behavior law for the sound material
(undamaged), and are given in an auxiliary file (file DUCTILITY.DATsee 17.3.3.1.9).
Data input for this model is identical to that for model 9.
MODEL 10
YIELD k
MATERIAL m
DUCTILITY -n
SLOPE -p
Ductile damage model with combined isotropic and kinematic strain hardening -
Leblond – Perrin model (MODEL 13)
This model is a combination of models 9 and 10. Strain hardening of the material is integrated
in an isotropic and kinematic form. The plasticity criterion is written:
with pisot representing the proportion of isotropic strain hardening.

Data input for this model is identical to that for model 9 (or 10), apart from the addition of the
PISOTROPE label defining pisot
MODEL 13
YIELD k
MATERIAL m
DUCTILITY -n
PISOTROPE Pisot
SLOPE -p

© 2019 ESI Group
Gurson - Tvergaard model (MODEL = 14)

This model has the same characteristics as model 10. Strain hardening of the material is
integrated in isotropic form. The plasticity criterion is written:
Strain hardening of the material is assumed to act in the same way on the von Mises equivalent
stress and mean stress. File DUCTILITY.DAT is not required in this case.
The model also takes account of the cavity germination and coalescence phases, in the same
way as model 9 or 10.
Data input for this model is identical to that for model 10, apart from the MATERIAL label
which is replaced by the SLOPE label.
MODEL 14
YIELD k
SLOPE p
DUCTILITY -n
Interpretation of the SLOPE and DYNAM labels is identical to that for model 2.
Global perfect elastoplasticity model applicable to thin shell elements - Simplified
model (MODEL = 21)
Global models work with generalized stress and strain states. The shell is assumed to change to
a plastic state when the yield stress is reached on the surface. In a case where only bending
forces are taken into account in the plasticity criterion formulation (membrane forces are
ignored), the term simplified global model is used. Global models are only applicable to thin
shell elements.
This type of model is less costly, and can provide an adequate level of accuracy for limit load
computation.
The theoretical basis of the global model is as follows:
A generalized state of stress is defined by the set of loads (membrane and bending) per unit of
length, applied to the shell element:

© 2019 ESI Group
A generalized strain state is defined by the set of strains and rotations:
The yield surface is defined by the following equation:
with
where h represents the thickness of the shell, and k the yield stress of the material.
MODEL 21
YIELD k
Yield stress k cannot be temperature-dependent.

Global perfect elastoplasticity model applicable to thin shell elements (MODEL = 22)
Global elastoplasticity model with kinematic strain hardening, applicable to thin shell
elements - Simplified model (MODEL = 23)
MODEL 23
YIELD k
SLOPE p
Elastic yield k cannot be temperature-dependent, and strain hardening slope p must be constant.
Global elastoplasticity model with kinematic strain hardening, applicable to thin shell
elements (MODEL = 24)

© 2019 ESI Group
Global elastoplasticity model with isotropic strain hardening, applicable to thin shell
elements - Simplified model (MODEL = 25)
MODEL 25
YIELD k
SLOPE p (or -i)
Yield stress k cannot be temperature-dependent. Strain hardening slope p on the other hand can
depend on total equivalent plastic strain, although not on temperature. Table i gives the plastic
stress-strain ratio for this case. This table must be type 1:
TABLE
i / 1 0 k σ1 σ2...
The first point entered must correspond to zero plastic strain. The corresponding stress is
therefore yield stress k.
Global elastoplasticity model with isotropic strain hardening, applicable to thin shell
elements (MODEL = 26)
Elastoplasticity models applicable to tube elements
A non linear beam element, code 1402, is available to model plasticity in straight and curved
tubes. Several formulations are available depending whether the transverse shear is taken into
account or not, and of the modeling of the mechanical behavior.
l SHAPE = 0. Old global model used with SYSTUS versions prior to version 2000.
Transverse shear is modeled and a global material behavior model is applied.

l SHAPE = 20, 21. Tube with transverse shear and global material behavior model.
Formulation 21 adds a variant to the formulation 20, which will be described later.
l SHAPE = 30. Tube with transverse shear and local material behavior model.
l SHAPE = 40, 41. Tube without transverse shear and with global material behavior model.
Formulation 41 adds a variant to the formulation 40, which will be described later.
l SHAPE = 50. Tube without transverse shear and local material behavior model.
For global behavior model which strains are obtained by superimposition of the strains due to
the kinematic of a straight beam and of the circumferential strain due to the internal pressure.
The inelasticity of the material (plasticity, creep) is described by a global plasticity model. An
adjustment of the global model parameters (flexibility) is used to model the behavior of a curved
tube.

© 2019 ESI Group
For local model, strains are obtained by superimposition of the strains of a straight beam and of
the circumferential strain due to the internal pressure and ovalization strain in the case of a
curved tube. The mechanical behavior of the material which includes plasticity and creep is
described by a local model with stations.
Element 1402 (SHAPE = 0)
The elastoplastic behavior model for tubes is a "global" model providing a good approximation
for limit analysis. The model therefore cannot be used to determine the state of stress at each
point in the thickness of the tube wall.
The element is formulated according to the following assumptions:
l conventional beam theory,
l circular cross-section (no ovalization)
l thin wall thickness compared with mean radius.
The yield surface is defined by a generalized stress quadratic function.

The conventional theory of plasticity can then be applied to obtain generalized strains.
Elbows
For curved elements representing elbows, bending stresses are defined by:
R = tube radius
e = wall thickness
with:
RC = radius of curvature
To activate this model, the user must specify:
MODEL l
YIELD σo
SLOPE p

© 2019 ESI Group
YIELD
defines the initial yield stress .
SLOPE Strain hardening slope p can be constant, or depend on generalized
equivalent plastic strain. In this case, table -p gives the plastic stress-
strain ratio. This table must be type 1.
TABLE defines some strain hardening properties.
MODEL defines strain hardening model.
l MODEL = 1, perfect plasticity.
l MODEL = 3 isotropic strain hardening.
SLOPE = p
If p > 0, p is the value of the constant strain hardening slope.
If p < 0, the ratio is defined in a table of type 1. The first point entered
must correspond to a zero plastic strain. The corresponding stress is
consequently σo.
TABLE
p / 1 0 σo ep1 σ1 σ2 ...
Element 1402 (SHAPE = 20, 40)

For the element 1402 with global model, plasticity laws are defined from the generalized
stresses and generalized strains.
where
l : Component of the generalized stress (i=1 to 6)
l : Component of the generalized strain (i=1 to 6)
l : Axial strain of a beam
l : Transverse shear strains along y- and z-axes
l : Bending strains around y- and z-axes
l R : Mean radius of the tube
l h : Thickness of the tube

© 2019 ESI Group
In the case of isotropic strain hardening, the plasticity criterion is written:
represents the circumferential stress due to internal pressure . are dimensionless

constants and defined by the user. is the yield stress, obtained from a classical
tensile test, that can be function of temperature and plastic strain.
In the case of kinematic strain hardening, the plasticity criterion is written:
Kinematic strain hardening variables are assumed to follow the relation:
c and γ are parameters, possibly function of temperature θ and represents generalized plastic
strains obtained by applying the generalized normality rule to the plasticity criterion:
where represents a consistency parameter.

In the case of combined strain hardening, the criterion is written:
To activate this model the user must specify in the MATERIAL PROPERTIES the following
labels:

© 2019 ESI Group
PLASTI t gives the number of the table defining the parameter values
used in the expression of the global plasticity
criterion.
TABLE
t /
by default, these constants have the following values:
=1
= =
=
= =
=
For a straight tube = 1,
and for a curved tube = if > 1,

else = 1.
RADIUS represents the curvature radius of the tube and R, the mean
radius of the section.
YIELD defines the initial yield stress .
SLOPE defines the properties of isotropic strain hardening (constant strain
hardening slope or strain hardening law ) or defines C, γ
which characterizes the non linear kinematic strain hardening.
TABLE defines some strain hardening properties in case of combined strain
hardening.

© 2019 ESI Group
MODEL defines strain hardening model.

l MODEL = 21, perfect plasticity.
YIELD = k
If k > 0, k is the yield stress value.
If k < 0, table number -k gives the yield stress as a function of
temperature.
l MODEL = 22, linear kinematic strain hardening.
YIELD = k (see MODEL 21).
SLOPE = p
The strain hardening slope is assumed to be constant and equal to p
(p>0).
l MODEL = 23 isotropic strain hardening.
SLOPE = p
If p > 0, p is the value of the constant strain hardening slope.
If p < 0, the law is defined in a table, usually of type 1 or 7, if
the strain hardening law is temperature dependent.
l MODEL = 27 isotropic strain hardening. The strain hardening law is
given by a power law.
SLOPE = p
Table number p gives the values of K and n, possibly temperature
dependent with the relation .

l MODEL = 28 non linear kinematic or combined strain hardening.
SLOPE = p
Table p gives the parameter values C, γ , possibly temperature
dependent.
TABLE
p / C γ
If C (respectively γ) is negative, then the parameter C (respectively γ) is

temperature dependent and its evolution law is given by the table number
-C (respectively -γ).
In case of combined strain hardening, the label TABLE must be
specified.
Table number t (type 1 or 7), gives the isotropic part ,

possibly temperature dependent.
For formulation 40, components of generalized stresses and generalized strains due to transverse
shear are null. In the previous relations , .
Element 1402 (SHAPE= 21, 41)

© 2019 ESI Group
The variant of the previous global model is applied. On one hand, the expression of
generalized stresses and generalized strains is modified,
for i = 1,2…6
for i = 1,2…6
and the coefficients have been defined in the formulation 20. are coefficients
, for a straight tube
, for a curved tube

FLEX is the flexibility of the curved tube (cf. 8.2.4.3).
Generalized stresses are multiplied by coefficients α i and generalized strains are defined in a
way that the relation describing the elastic behavior is written a simple form as follows:
On the other hand, the plastic flow law is modified regarding the new expression of the
generalized strains:
where F is the unchanged expression of the plasticity criterion. For example, if the strain
hardening is isotropic:
MATERIAL PROPERTIES labels and their signification remain unchanged.

© 2019 ESI Group
Element 1402 (SHAPE = 30, 50)

For the element 1402 with local model, strain hardening laws are defined from the equivalent
von Mises stress and from the equivalent plastic strain classically defined.
In this option, plasticity models number 1, 3, 7 and 8 described in paragraph Perfect plasticity
(MODEL = 1) are available.
However in the case of model 8, only non linear kinematic strain hardening is available, with
only one strain hardening variable. Input data is simplified as follows:
l MODEL = 8
l YIELD = k if k < 0, the table (-k) gives the yield stress function of the temperature.
l PENTE = p, the table number "p" gives the parameters C, γ of the kinematic strain hardening
variable evolution law.

l TABLE
p / (value of C), (value of γ)

if C or (and) g are temperature-dependent, table p is referring to another table which gives
or .

© 2019 ESI Group
RECAPITULATION
*The use of reduced quadratic elements (label INTEG in MATERIAL PROPERTIES) is

recommended with von Mises criterion, especially in the presence of large strains.
*The use of reduced quadratic elements (label INTEG in MATERIAL PROPERTIES) is

recommended with von Mises criterion, especially in the presence of large strains.

© 2019 ESI Group
*The formulation of global plasticity models is not taking into account transverse shears.
Consequently, it is not recommended to use these models for structure composed of thick shell
elements.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.4 Viscoplasticity
17.4 VISCOPLASTICITY
17.4.1 Introduction
Four classes of viscoplastic behavior models are available:
l non-unified elasto-viscoplastic behavior models, which can be combined with normal
elastoplastic models for which mechanical strain (total strain - thermal strain) is split into:
o elastic strain,
o time-independent plastic strain,
o time-dependent viscoplastic (creep) strain,
l unified elasto-viscoplastic behavior models, where mechanical strain (total strain - thermal
strain) is subdivided into:

o elastic part,
o time-dependent plastic part,
l rigid viscoplastic behavior model disregarding elastic strain.
l elastoviscoplastic behavior model, coupled with creep damage.
All viscoplastic models are defined by the characteristic:
CREEP f
which refers to a table defining the viscoplastic model, giving the associated parameters:
TABLE
f / model (associated parameters)
and which is added to the elastic characteristics (Chapter 17.2 ) and plastic characteristics
(Chapter 17.3).

© 2019 ESI Group
17.4.2 Non-Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models

Mechanical strain is split into:
l elastic strain ,
l time-independent plastic strain
l time-dependent viscoplastic strain (creep)
Unidirectional rheological representation

Creep strain is written:
with
Three models are available:

“STRAIN HARDENING” model (model = 1)
(Primary creep)
(Secondary creep, Norton's law)

Choice between both laws is made upon the following criterion: at each time increment,
SYSTUS takes the greatest value between and
Corresponding input data is as follows:
TABLE
f / 1 X1 Y1 -n X2 Y2 n1 n2
n /

© 2019 ESI Group
Z1 is naturally negative, and is defined in a lower level table.

“TIME HARDENING” model (model = 2)
(primary creep, Ramses' law)
(secondary creep, Norton's law)

Choice between both laws is made upon the following criterion: at each time increment,
SYSTUS takes the greatest value of
TABLE
f / 2 X Y Z X2 Y2
"VISCOUS" model (model = 41)
with
where η is the material viscosity, which may depend on temperature.

This model corresponds to Norton's law for secondary creep of the previous models with (Y2 =
1).It is particularly suitable for problems of glass behavior beyond the transition temperature
(liquid <-> solid).
The behavior law is analytically integrated in time; therefore the time steps can be larger than
those of the other models.
TABLE
f / 41 X2 1
Notes:
l The “STRAIN HARDENING” and “TIME HARDENING” models produce the same results for
simulation of a creep test (under constant stress). Parameters are selected as follows:
In practice, the “STRAIN HARDENING” model gives better results for variable strain problems.
l All parameters can be temperature-dependent, applying the normal SYSTUS convention (negative
value to refer to a table).

© 2019 ESI Group
l To model the secondary creep phase only (model 1 or model 2), the user must assign zero values
to the first three parameters in the list.
l Models 1 or 2 can be combined with various plasticity models (see table at end of chapter).
Examples:
1- Strain hardening type primary creep
X1 = 2.10-20 Y1 = 9 Z1 = -1,50
secondary creep
X2 = 6.10 -15 Y2 = 5
MATERIAL
... / CREEP 11
...
TABLE
11/1 (2*-20 9 - 14) (6.*-15 5)
14/1.50
2- Same type of creep as above, but with temperature-dependent coefficients.
3- secondary CREEP only

X2 = 6.10 -15 Y2 = 5
MATERIAL
... / CREEP 11
...
TABLE
11 / 1 0 0 0 6*-15 5

© 2019 ESI Group
17.4.3 Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models (Model = 21)

In contrast to the preceding models, this class only takes one non-elastic strain into account,
namely viscoplastic strain .
These models postulate the existence of an elasticity domain, inside which only instantaneous,
reversible elastic strains occur. As with elastoplasticity, this domain is defined on the basis of
scalar value function F :
In contrast to elastoplasticity, a load point can “exit” from the domain, in which case a
viscoplastic strain appears.
F depends on the state of stress, and internal variables reflecting the strain hardening of the
material. As for elastoplasticity (see Chapter 17.3), distinction is made between two types of
strain hardening:
l isotropic strain hardening, corresponding to expansion of the elasticity domain, and governed
by internal scalar variable (total equivalent (visco) plastic strain):
l Kinematic strain hardening, corresponding to displacement of the elasticity domain in the

stress space, and represented by tensor variable .
The two types of strain hardening can be combined.
In the case of materials following the von Mises criterion, function F , is written as follows:

© 2019 ESI Group
where k represents the initial yield stress (for zero viscoplastic strain), with , the
isotropic hardening variable which is supposed to depend on the total equivalent viscoplastic
strain .
Viscoplastic strain is written:
with
where K and n are the viscosity parameters of the material.

Note:
l Function F is also referred to as “viscous stress”:
where σ ν represents the distance, in the stress base, from the load point to the frontier of the
elasticity domain (von MISES cylinder).
Input data for this class of model is as follows:
MATERIAL
... / MODEL m YIELD ... SLOPE ... CREEP f
TABLE
f / 21 K n ν
...
The constitutive equations are integrated in time using the generalized central differences
algorithm. Parameter ν (0 ≤ ν ≤ 1) characterizes the algorithm. ν = 0.5 corresponds to the
central differences algorithm, and is the default value. ν = 0 corresponds to the explicit
Eulerian algorithm, and ν = 1 , to the implicit Eulerian algorithm.
The explicit integration algorithm ( ν = 0) is conditionally stable, and consequently requires
small time steps. On the other hand, it has the advantage of breaking down the solution of a
non-linear problem into a succession of linear solutions. Integration algorithms corresponding
to values of ν between 0.5 and 1 are unconditionally stable, and allow the use of larger time
steps.

© 2019 ESI Group
These labels (MODEL, YIELD, SLOPE, etc.) define the yield stress and strain hardening of
the material. The reader should refer to the recapitulative table at the end of this chapter, for a
list of the various strain hardening models available according to the elemet concerned, and to
Chapter 17.3 for corresponding input data details.
Isotropic hardening recovery can be introduced in the model. In this case, the isotropic variable
is supposed to depend on some recovered equivalent viscoplastic strain denoted
the evolution of which is given by:
and are 2 parameters that can be temperature dependent.

To account for this effect, one must introduce and parameters in the table giving the
parameters of the creep model:
Note:
l Parameters K, n, C and m can be temperature-dependent, using the normal SYSTUS rules
(negative value for reference to a table).
Example:
MATERIAL
... /CREEP 11
...
TABLE
11/21 -6 -7
6/1 400 450 500 490 600 580 700 630
7/1 400 40 500 35 600 28 700 16
The central difference integration algorithm is used ( ν = 0.5), and coefficients K and n are
given as a function of temperature, in tables 6 and 7.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.4.4 Chaboche Model

The Chaboche unified elastoviscoplastic behavior model is particularly suitable for the
simulation of cyclic problems (cyclic creep and fatigue - creep interaction).
The viscoplastic strain evolution law is given by:
with if
if
k: initial yield stress of the material,

R: isotropic strain hardening variable,
: components of the kinematic strain hardening variable,
αR, αK, K0, n, mp : material parameters
The kinematic and isotropic strain hardening variable evolution laws are the same as those
associated with plasticity model n° 8. These laws can be used to integrate time-related recovery
terms for viscoplastic problems. In this case, the strain hardening variable evolution equations
are completed as follows:
Kinematic strain hardening
where represents the von Mises invariant of tensor

© 2019 ESI Group
Isotropic strain hardening

Only isotropic strain hardening model n° 3 is available with recovery effects:
with
Only data concerning time-related recovery effects are defined in the CREEP table. The reader
should refer to Chapter 17.3 for details of the other data.
Input data for this model are as follows:
MATERIAL
... / MODEL 8 YIELD ... SLOPE ... CREEP f
TABLE
f / 21
...
Data ir defines the recovery terms to be taken into account:

l if ir ≤ 0 or ir > 3 : no recovery
l if ir = 1: recovery of kinematic variable(s) only
l if ir = 2: recovery of the isotropic variable only
l if ir = 3: recovery of all kinematic and isotropic variables.
Note:
l All parameters (apart from ν ) can be made temperature-dependent by entering a negative value
(reference to a table).

© 2019 ESI Group
17.4.5 Thermo-Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior Models (Model = 51)

This class of model represents an extension of the unified behavior model (see Chap. 17.4.3).
These models take account of temperature increase resulting from that part of viscoplastic
energy dissipated in the form of heat. Heat diffusion phenomena are ignored (assumed
adiabaticity). This class of model is consequently reserved for problems involving high strain
rates at high temperature.
Dissipated strain energy is broken down into two parts:
Energy dissipated in the form of heat causes a local temperature increase, modifying the
mechanical characteristics of the material. This is calculated as follows:
where ρ and c represent, respectively, the density and specific heat of the material.
Input data for this class model are as follows:
MATERIAL
... / MODEL m YIELD ... SLOPE ... CREEP f --
LX LY LZ a DISSIPATION x RHO ρ C c
TABLE
f / 51 K n ν
...
The THERMO label must not be present on the OPTION card with this type of model.
Input data for this class of model are identical to those for unified models (see Chapter 17.4.3),
part from the RHO and C labels, which must be added in this case. The user can specify the
fraction of viscoplastic energy ( 0 ≤ x ≤ 1 ) dissipated in the form of heat, using the
DISSIPATION label. By default, or if x = 0, the program calculates this fraction directly from
the strain hardening laws for the material.
Density, specific heat and coefficient of expansion can be made temperature- dependent
applying the usual SYSTUS rules (negative value to refer to a table).

© 2019 ESI Group
17.4.6 Rigid Viscoplastic Model (Model = 61)

This behavior model ignores the elastic part of total strain, and is therefore particularly suitable
for problems involving major viscoplastic transformations, such as hot-forming problems.
This behavior law is written:
with
σ s , K, n and m are parameters of the material, which can be dependent on temperature θ.

Parameter m takes the following values :
0< m ≤ 1
m =0: rigid plastic limit behavior
m =1: “Newtonian fluid” type limit behavior.
Rigid plastic limit behavior (m=0) cannot be handled.
Viscoplastic yield meets the condition of incompressibility:
This behavior law can also be written the following form:
(stress deviator)
with
where σm represents the mean stress associated with the condition of incompressibility.

© 2019 ESI Group
Input data for this model is as follows:
MATERIAL
... / E e NU ν CREEP f
TABLE
f / 61 K n m σs ,
...
The E and NU labels are not required for membrane elements (state of plane stress). In other
cases, these labels can be used to define material compressibility modulus M , relating mean
stress to mean strain:
Notes:
l K, n, m and σs can be made temperature-dependent, applying the usual SYSTUS convention.
l The constitutive equations are integrated in time using the implicit Eulerian algorithm.
l The evolution equations are regularized for low strain rates , using a “Newtonian
fluid” type behavior law.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.4.7 Elastoviscoplastic Model Coupled with Creep Damage

(Model 71)
This is a unified behavior model which integrates damage to the material, applying the concept
of effective stress.
Mechanical strain is written:
and effective stress s is given by:
where D represents material damage.

The viscoplastic strain evolution law is given by:
and
where k is the yield stress of the material, and

K0, n and m are its viscoplastic flow law parameters.
The damage evolution law is given by:
where A, α and β are the damage law parameters.

The damage criterion is written:
where J0 is the largest principal stress,
J1 is the first invariant of stress tensor

J2 is the von Mises invariant of stress tensor
a and b are sensitivity parameters for the criterion with respect to the triaxiality of the stresses.

© 2019 ESI Group
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
/ … CREEP f
TABLE
f / 71 K0, n, ν , m, A, α , β , a, b
Parameters K 0 , n, m, A, α and β can be temperature-dependant in accordance with the normal

SYSTUS convention.
Note:
l For numerical reasons, it is preferable to take a = 0 (with J0 non-derivable). The damage
criterion is then written:

© 2019 ESI Group
17.4.8 Creep Models Applicable to Tube Elements

Only elements 1402 (SHAPE = 20, 21, 30, 40, 41, 50) are concerned.
Input data for these models is the following
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
/ … CREEP f
TABLE
f / n (parameters list)
Table number f gives the number n of the creep model and the corresponding parameters.
For element with global model (SHAPE=20, 21, 40, 41), creep laws are expressed according
to generalized equivalent stress and generalized creep strain.
Model number n can be 101 or 102.
If n = 101, parameters are X 1 , Y 1 , Z 1 , X', Y', n1 , n2 . Primary creep is represented by a strain
hardening law
Secondary creep is defined by
If n = 102, parameters are X 2, Y 2, Z2, X', Y' ; Primary creep is represented by a time hardening
law
Secondary creep is not modified.

For element with local model (SHAPE=30, 50), creep laws are expressed according to the
equivalent von MISES stress and equivalent creep strain.
Model number can be 1 or 2.
If MODEL = 1, parameters are X 1 , Y 1 , Z 1 , X', Y', n 1 ,n 2 . Primary creep is represented by a
strain hardening law. Secondary creep law is as defined previously.
If MODEL = 2, parameters are X 2 , Y 2 , Z 2 , X', Y'. Primary creep is represented by a time
hardening law function of time. Secondary creep law is as defined previously.

© 2019 ESI Group
RECAPITULATIVE TABLE

© 2019 ESI Group
*The use of first order elements (2004, 3008) or reduced quadratic elements (label INTEG in
MATERIAL PROPERTIES) is recommended with von Mises criterion, especially in the
presence of large displacements or large strains.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.5 Viscoelasticity
17.5 VISCOELASTICITY
17.5.1 Introduction
SYSTUS includes two isotropic viscoelastic behavior models. These models are defined by the
material property:
CREEPf
which refers to a table defining the viscoelastic model, and containing the associated
parameters:
TABLE
f / model (associated parameters)
and which is added to the conventional elastic characteristics (see Chapter 17.2).

© 2019 ESI Group
17.5.2 Generalized MAXWELL Model (Linear Viscoelasticity)

(Model = 11)
Presentation and General Hypotheses of the Model
This model is particularly suitable for problems of glass and plastic behavior below vitreous
transition temperatures, and soil studies.
The model is based on the following generally hypotheses:
1. Isotropic material
2. Material subject to small transformations (small displacements and strains),
3. The viscoelastic characteristics of the material (relaxation time) are temperature-independent.
This model relates the stress tensor to the strain tensor as follows:
Unidirectional rheological representation of this model is as follows:
The shear modulus of the material varies according to the following law:

© 2019 ESI Group
th
where is the relaxation time associated with the k element of the MAXWELL
model.
μ k and η k designate the shear modulus and viscosity respectively, associated with the k th
element of the MAXWELL model.
A maximum of 4 elements, or 4 spring-damper pairs (μk and ηk) can be used.
Notes:
l is the initial shear modulus. The instantaneous response of the material is elastic, and
we should have:
l μ0 is the limit shear modulus of the material.
Input Data
MATERIAL
... / E e NU ν CREEP f
TABLE
f / 11 μ0 η1 T1 ... η4 T4

© 2019 ESI Group
17.5.3 Thermo-Viscoelastic Model (Model = 12)

Presentation and General Hypotheses of the Model
This model is particularly suitable for problems concerning the thermo-mechanical behavior of
glass, plastics and ceramics.
The model is based on the following general hypotheses:
1. Isotropic material
2. Material subject to small transformations (small displacements and strains),
3. The viscoelastic characteristics of the material (relaxation time) can betemperature-dependent.
4. The change from liquid phase to solid phase in the vitreous transition zone of the material is taken
into account.
This model relates the stress tensor to the strain tensor as follows:
where μ(t), K(t) and εth represent the shear modulus, modulus of compressibility and thermal
strain at time t, respectively.
Thermal strain εth is due to the thermal expansion (or contraction) of the liquid/solid mixture.
Where a temperature drop occurs between time 0 (temperature θ 0 greater than vitreous
transition temperature) and time t (temperature θ(t)):
with,
αl : coefficient of expansion of the liquid phase according to temperature
αg : coefficient of expansion of the solid phase according to temperature
θf(t) : "Fictitious temperature" dependent on time.
“Fictitious temperature” θ f is used to quantify the relative importance of the liquid and solid
phases.
At the start of a cooling process, starting from a liquid state, θ f follows the evolution of
temperature θ , the variation rate of θ f drops below that of θ (start of liquid- to- solid
transformation), and finally the value of θf stabilizes (end of liquid-to-solid transformation).

© 2019 ESI Group
The evolution of θf in time is given by the relation:
where Mν(t) is the volume relaxation function:
The Ci values are weighting factors, such that:
and the ιi(θ) values are relaxation times at temperature θ.

Relaxation times vary with temperature according to an Arhenius type law. This law is
expressed with Kelvins. The user enters the temperatures in Celsius degrees, and then the
program adds the value 273.15 to perform the conversion to Kelvins:
where,
l θr represents a reference temperature,
l ιir is relaxation time at the reference temperature
l H, is activation energy
l R, is universal gas constant (energy/degree)
l x, is a constant of the material (value between 0 and 1)
Shear modulus μ(t) is written:
μ(t) = μ1 + (μ0 - μ1) Ms (t)
where μ0 is the initial shear modulus:

© 2019 ESI Group
and μ1 is the limit shear modulus (corresponding to large time values or high temperatures).
Ms (t) is the relaxation function of the shear modulus,
The Wk values are weighting factors, such that:
and the λk(θ) values are relaxation times at temperature θ.

Relaxation time λ k (θ) of the shear modulus varies with temperature according to an Arhenius
type law:
λk(θ) = λkr A (θr, θ, θf)
where λkr is the relaxation time at reference temperature θr.
The modulus of compressibility K(t) is written:
K(t) = K1 + (K0 - K1 ) Mp(t)
where K0 is the initial modulus of compressibility:
and K 1 is the limit modulus of compressibility (corresponding to large time values or high
temperatures).
Mp(t) is the relaxation function of the modulus of compressibility:
The Vk values are weighting factors, such that:
and the δk(θ) values are relaxation times at temperature θ.

© 2019 ESI Group
Relaxation times δk(θ) for the modulus of compressibility vary with temperature according to an
Arhenius type law:
δk(θ) = δkr A (θr, θ, θf)
where δkr is the relaxation time at reference temperature θr.
Input Data
Labels LX, LY and LZ give the number of a table (n) defining the coefficients of expansion
for the solid phase (αg ) and liquid phase ( αl ). These coefficients can be made temperature-
dependent by application of the usual SYSTUS rules (negative value for reference to a table).
The PHASE label defines the number of phases to be taken into account (2 if both liquid and
solid phases are present, or 1 if only the solid phase is present).
The CREEP label is followed by the number of a table defining the parameters for the
relaxation functions of the modulus of compressibility, shear modulus and volume. n s and n p
can take maximum values of 4, and nv a maximum value of 6.
Notes:
l If only the solid phase is to be taken into account, the data must be:
PHASE = 1
αg
k = 0
l If relaxation of the modulus of compressibility is ignored, the data must be:
K0 = K1 and/or j = 0
l Likewise, if relaxation of the shear modulus is ignored, the data must be:
μ0 = μ1 and/or i = 0
l If temperature-dependence of relaxation times is ignored, the user must define:
0 and x = 0 where appropriate.

© 2019 ESI Group
RECAPITULATIVE TABLE

© 2019 ESI Group
17.5.4 Non-Linear Viscoelasticity Model (Model = 13)

Presentation of the Model
This model, alone or associated in parallel for example to an elastoplastic model is particularly
suitable for the modelization of polymers in viscoelasticity domain. It is used to take into
account the differences of behavior we can notice in function of the strain rate. The
viscoelasticity concerns the deviatory part and the spherical part of the stresses. This model is
available in large strains (Behaviour MODIFY).
Rheological representation of this model is as follows:
Equations of this model are given here after:.
Assuming that and are the stress tensor components respectively in the elastic segment
and the viscoelastic segment
The stress tensor of the elastic segment is retated to the total strain through Hooke law (
coefficients of Lamé).
The stress tensor of the viscoelastic and the strain tensor are decomposed into a deviatoric part
and a spherical part:
with
with

© 2019 ESI Group
In the above equations, and represent respectively the mean stress and the components
of the stress deviator associated to the viscoelastic segment and, and , the mean strain rate
and the components of the eulerian strain rate tensor. and are the compressibility
modulus and the shear modulus of the viscoelastic segment and, and are the viscosity
constants associated respectively to the spherical and deviatoric behavior.
The constants of viscocity can depends on the strain rate through the following laws:
Input Data
Input data for this model is as follows:
E and NU labels define elastic constants associated to the elastic segment. This part is included
when Elast ≠ 0. By default, Elast = 0 it is not taken into account.
When the constants of viscosity are dependent on strain rate the user must give negative values
to and . The tables et describe then the corresponding evolutions :

© 2019 ESI Group
17.6 Hyperelasticity
17.6 HYPERELASTICITY
17.6.1 Theory
Hyper elastic models are particularly suitable for representing the behavior of quasi-
incompressible or compressible materials such as elastomers, subjected to large strains.
In finite elasticity, the material behavior law is defined by the strain energy density
depending on the Green-Lagrange strain where represent the Cauchy-
Green dilatation tensor and , the transformation gradient tensor.
The strain energy density is related to the second Piola-Kirchhoff tensor and the Green-
Lagrange strain tensor as:
To reproduce the compressible hyper elastic behavior on certain material, we split the local
strain in a volume part associated with the thermal strain, a volume part linked to the mechanical
strain and an isochoric part. So we split in a thermal part ( ), a part ( ) associated to the
volume changes and ( ) associated to strain without volume changes.
The strain energy density became:
With and
Polynomial model
Where, and . We retrieve the classical

Mooney-Rivlin model by imposing , so the isochoric part of the strain energy density
could be written as:

© 2019 ESI Group
We retrieve also the Yeoh model by choosing :
In SYSTUS, the sum: in this model.

Neo-Hooke model
The Neo-Hookian model correspond to a polynomial model where all the coefficient are null
except for :
Ogden model
Where are the square roots of the Eigen values of . In SYSTUS, the maximum
number of couples is limited to 6.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.6.2 Input Data

The input data corresponding to the different hyperelastic behaviors is as follows:
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
ELEMENTS /HYPERELASTICITY h NU ν INTEGRATION g EVOL c LX lx LY ly LZ lz
…
TABLE
h / model, parameters
c / D1, D2, …, Dn
LX lx LY ly LZ lz define the thermal dilatation coefficients.

The TABLE h defines the type of hyper elasticity model:
Model = 1: polynomial model
The parameters are:
K10, K01, K20, K11, K02, K30, K21, K12, K03
To obtain the Mooney-Rivlin model, we enter only K10, K01
To obtain the Neo Hooke model, we enter K10=μ/2.
To obtain the Yeoh model, we enter K10, 0, K20, 0, 0, K30
Model = 2: Neo Hooke model.
The only model parameter is the shear coefficient μ.
Model = 3: Ogden model.
The parameters are:
μ1, α1, μ2, α2, μ3, α3, μ4, α4, μ5, α5, μ6, α6,
The TABLE c defined the strain energy density associated to the volume change:
Particular case: quasi-incompressible materials:

It is possible to obtain quasi-incompressible materials by choosing a very small value of . If
the EVOL table is defined, the NU parameter is ignored. If EVOL is absent, then the NU
parameter is used in the computation of the penalty coefficient used to numerically impose the
incompressibility condition. NU must be inferior but close to 0.5 (generally 0.49 or 0.499). This
option is only available for the Neo-Hooke, Mooney-Rivlin, Yeoh et Ogden models.
The use of quadratic elements with reduced integration is highly recommended with these
behavior laws (INTEGRATION label) in the three-dimensional, two-dimensional translation
and axisymetrical two- dimensional options. It is not necessary in the case of the two-
dimensional plane option (plane stress).

© 2019 ESI Group
These models are only available in total Lagrangian formulations. (cf. recapitulative table). The
generalized plane strains formulation is not available.
Recapitulative Table

© 2019 ESI Group
17.7 User-Programmed Behavior Law
17.7 USER-PROGRAMMED BEHAVIOR LAW

17.7.1 Principle
The user can program a specific behavior law in the USLOIC user subroutine. This
functionality is available for the finite elements of the following table:
Knowing the following for the current increment, noted t + ∆t :

l total mechanical strain (total strain - thermal strain) from the displacement data known for a
given iteration:
l stresses "computed elastically " during the increment, between t and t + ∆t :
l temperature (thermo-mechanical problems),

l and time (creep problems),
l the subroutine calculates the following for the current increment, and for a given integration
point in the element:
l stresses {σ(t + Dt)} which comply with the inelastic behavior law of the material,

© 2019 ESI Group
l where applicable, the tangent material behavioral matrix [Dp] (which relates the stress
increment to the mechanical strain increment),
l various other information, such as inelastic strain components, etc.
17.7.2 Programming and Interpretation of Arguments

The subroutine must include the following arguments:
SUBROUTINE USLOIC (IDIM, A, B, D, DP, IDP, IS, ISS, ICTRPL, INCRE, MODIF, GAMMA, KZ,
KC, IPAGE, MAILL, TRA, RCMAT, CONST).
Table 17-1 defines the arguments, and their declaration for 2-dimensional and 3-dimensional
options.
Table 17-2 defines the arguments and their declaration for the 3-dimensional shell option.
A list of the first four COMMON blocks is given in Chapter 18.
COMMON CONSTE contains the elastic constants, and is described in table 17-3.
Table 17-4 explains variable KC for 2-dimensional and 3-dimensional options.
Table 17-5 explains variable D for the 3-dimensional shell option.
The structure of the force data in the transient file is described in Section 17.9. The tables in
this Chapter define the storage positions specified by the environment of the user subroutine,
with the other positions freely selectable by the user.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.7.3 Input Data

l the LAW label, followed by value 1, with the MATERIAL PROPERTIES command,
l the PLASTIC label with the NON-LINEAR TRANISENT BEHAVIOUR command, to store
loads in the TRANSIENT file.

The user can also use conventional labels (MODEL, YIELD, SLOPE, CREEP, etc.) to define the
non-linear characteristics of the material.

© 2019 ESI Group
Table 17-1: Interpretation of arguments for TWO-DIMENSIONAL

and THREE-DIMENSIONAL options (contd.)

© 2019 ESI Group
Table 17-2: Interpretation of arguments for spatial SHELL option

(contd.)

© 2019 ESI Group
Table 17-3: contents of COMMON block CONSTE
Table17-4: Interpretation of variable KC

© 2019 ESI Group
Table 17-5: interpretation of variable D for spatial SHELL option

(h = thickness of shell element)

© 2019 ESI Group
17.8 Large Displacements and Large Strains
17.8 LARGE DISPLACEMENTS AND LARGE STRAINS

17.8.1 Spatial Beam and Shell Options
Three formulations are possible for problems concerning large displacements and large rotations
with the spatial beam and spatial shell options:
l The total Lagrangian formulation solves equilibrium equations in initial structure
configuration Co (non-deformed configuration), using the stress and strain tensors defined in
this initial configuration:
o Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor in configuration C
o
o Green-Lagrange strain tensor Co
This formulation is suitable for large elastic displacements of structures.
l The updated Lagrangian formulation solves equilibrium equations in deformed configuration
Ct, at the preceding instant, using stress and strain tensors defined in configuration Ct,:
o Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor in configuration C ,
t
o Green-Lagrange strain tensor Ct ,
This formulation is suitable for large displacements and large elastic or elasto-(visco) plastic
rotations in structures.
l The modified updated Lagrangian formulation solves equilibrium equations in current
deformed configuration Ct+Δt , using:

o Cauchy stress tensor,
o strain rate tensor.
This formulation is suitable for large displacements and large elastic or elasto-(visco) plastic
rotations in structures.
Table 17- 6 gives the application field for these different formulations for each element,
according to the behavior of the material. Labels used with the BEHAVIOR command of the
TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR procedure are shown in brackets.

© 2019 ESI Group
TABLE 17-6: Application field for formulations with large

transformations for spatial BEAM and spatial SHELL options.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.8.2 Two-Dimensional and Three-Dimensional Options

Two types of formulation are available for problems involving large transformations (large
displacements and large strains):
l The total Lagrangian formulation solves equilibrium equations in deformed configuration C ,
t
at the preceding instant, using stress and strain tensors defined in configuration Ct:
o Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor in configuration C ,
t
o Green-Lagrange strain tensor Ct,
This formulation is suitable for large displacements and large elastic or hyperelastic strains of
structures.
l The modified updated Lagrangian formulation solves equilibrium equations in current
deformed configuration Ct+Δt, using:

o Cauchy stress tensor,
o strain rate tensor.
This formulation is suitable for large displacements and large elastic, hyperelastic, visco-
elastic or elasto-(visco)plastic strains of structures.
This formulation requires introduction of an objective derivative of the stress tensor. SYSTUS
offers a choice of 2 objective derivatives:
l Jauman derivative,
l Green-Naghdi derivative which improves behavior under shear effect.
Table 17-7 presents the application field for these various formulations according to material
behavior, and the type of computed stress. Labels used with the BEHAVIOR command of the
procedure NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT are shown in brackets.
Notes:
l Only the modified updated Lagrangian formulation can be used to handle interaction between large
strains and the plastic or viscoplastic behavior of the material.
l The modified updated Lagrangian formulation requires, for an equal level of result accuracy,
smaller load increments than for the total Lagrangian formulation.

© 2019 ESI Group
Table 17-7: Application field for formulations with large

transformations of TWO-DIMENSIONAL and THREE-
DIMENSIONAL options.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.9 Transient File Force Contents
17.9 TRANSIENT FILE FORCE CONTENTS

17.9.1 Introduction
The non-linear transient state computation procedure
TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR ...

...
RETURN
stores the analysis results in a TRANSIENT file, containing, for each computation card stored:
l DISPLACEMENT file containing displacements for all nodes of the model at the corresponding
time,
l VELOCITY file (dynamic analysis only) containing node velocities,
l ACCELERATION file (dynamic analysis only) containing node accelerations,
l REACTION file containing the reactions of the external medium at the constrained nodes of the
structure. This file contains computation residues for non-constrained nodes,
l FORCE file containing stresses and internal variables associated with the behavior module for the
material, for all elements,
l PRESSURE file containing contact reaction at the nodes, and various information concerning the
contact media (or macro-elements),
l VALUE file containing all information associated with all media taken into account in the analysis.
The reader should refer to Chapter 8-11 for a description of the PRESSURE and VALUE files.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.9.2 General Structure of the Force File

The structure of the FORCE file depends on the labels associated with the BEHAVIOR
command, indicating the type of analysis, and the STRESS command of the NON LINEAR
TRANSIENT procedure.
TRANSIENT NON LINEAR ...

...
BEHAVIOR (labels)
...
STRESSES l
...
RETURN
1st case:
If one of the following labels:
l PLASTIC,
l VISCOELASTIC,
l UPDATED,
is present, the FORCE file contains a record for each element, containing ng + 1 blocks of
equal length, ng being the maximum number of integration points for the elements used:
l = (ng + 1).lss
lss is the maximum number of components stored by integration point for all the structure.
The length (lss) of each block depends on computation options. Block format is as follows:
The first block contains mean stress and internal variable values on the element. The following
blocks contain corresponding values for the integration points.
2nd case:
With the LARGE label (total Lagrangian formulation), associated with an elastic (linear or non-
linear) or hyperelastic (HYPERELASTIC label) behavior, the integration point values are not
normally stored. In this case, the FORCE file contains a record comprising lss values, for each
element.
If the user wishes to store integration values in this case, the following command must be
specified:

© 2019 ESI Group
STRESS l
with l = (ng + 1).lss.
3rd case:
If the BEHAVIOUR command is absent, namely where the complete structure has an elastic
(linear or non-linear) behavior with small displacements and small strains, the FORCE file
contains the same information as for a linear problem (see Chapter 8). Here again, the user can
store integration point values, using command:
STRESS l
with l = (ng + 1).lss.

© 2019 ESI Group
17.9.3 Spatial SHELL - Spatial BEAM Option

Length of the mean value block or an integration point block is:
lss = max (lss1, lss2, lss3, lss4)
with
lss1 = 30 (1 + nsta) for a 3D shell,
lss2 = 30 for a 3D beam,
lss3 = 60 for a 3D solid element with the SHELL MULTI or
BEAM MULTI options,
lss4 = 15 (1 + nsta) for a tube element,
where nsta is the maximum number of points in the thickness associated with shell elements, in
the case of layered elastoplastic or viscoplastic behavior models. If only global elastoplastic
models are used, nsta = 0 , and consequently lss = 30 for shell elements and 15 for tube
elements.
For a layered model, the block associated with each integration point of the mean surface has
the following format:
Elasticity
Total Lagrangian formulation
The following information is stored for a code 2003 shell element:
A( 1 to 8) : Generalized forces:
Nxx, Nxy, Nyy, Mxx, Mxy, Myy, Txz, Tyz
A( 9 to 16) : Generalized strains (less thermal strain)
Exx, 2 Exy, Eyy, Χxx, 2Χxy, Χyy, γxz, γyz
A(25) : Surface strain energy density
A(26) : Time (in mean value block only)
A(27) : Mean surface temperature
A(30) : Element surface
For a cable element (code 1202), the data stored in the mean value block are:
A( 1) : Axial load on node 1 (Nx)
A( 7) : Axial load on node 2.

© 2019 ESI Group
Updated (or modified updated) Lagrangian formulation

For code 2003, 2403 and 2404 shell elements, the following data are stored in the mean value
block, or the block associated with each mean surface integration point:
A( 9 to 16) : Generalized strains (less thermal strain)
A(26) : Time (in mean value block only)
For code 1002 and 1402 beam elements, the data stored in the mean value block are as follows:
A( 1 to 6) : Generalized forces at node 1 in the local reference frame of the element (Nx, Ty,
Tz, Mx, My, Mz)
A( 7 to 12) : Generalized forces on node 2.
Elasto-Plasticity
Thin shell (2003) or thick shell 2403, 2404, 2406 and 2408 elements
The mean value block contains the following data:
A( 9 to 16) : Generalized strains:
A(26) : Time
A(27) : Element mean temperature
Global models - thin shells only (models 21 to 26)
A( 1 to 8) : Generalized loads:
A( 9 to 16) : Generalized strains (excluding thermal strain)
A(17 to 24) : Generalized plastic strains (bends and membrane strains)

A(26) : Total equivalent generalized plastic strain
A(30) : Limit stress (isotropic strain-hardening variable)

© 2019 ESI Group
Layered models (models 1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 8)

Generalized variables
A( 1 to 8) : Generalized loads :
Nxx, Nxy, Nyy, Mxx, Mxy, Myy Txz, Tyz
A( 9 to 16) : Generalized strains
Exx, 2 Exy, Eyy, Χxx, 2 Χxy, Χyy, γxz, γyz
A(17 to 24) : Generalized plastic strains

Local variables (for each layer)
: Stresses
A( 1 to 5)
: Plastic strains
A( 6 to 10)
: Kinematic strain hardening variable

A(11 to 15)
: Total equivalent plastic strain

A(16)
A(18) : Memory isotropic variable q (with model 8)

A(21 to 25) : Second kinematic strain hardening variable (with model 8)
A(26 to 30) : Non-unit normal to the non-strain-hardening surface in the (visco) plastic
strain space (with model 8)
Tube element (1402 - SHAPE = 0)

Stored data are associated with the nodes of the element, and not with integration points.
The FORCE file contains three blocks of 30 words each for each element.
1st block - A(1) to A(30).
A( 1 to 6) : Generalized forces at node 1 in the local reference frame of the element (Nx, Ty,
Tz, Mx, My, Mz)
A( 7 to 12) : Generalized forces at node 2.
2nd block - A(31) to A(60), associated with node 1

© 2019 ESI Group
A(31 to 36) : Generalized forces at node 1 in the local reference frame of the element
A(55) : Yield stress
A(56) : Cumulated equivalent plastic strain
3rd block- A(61) to A(90), associated with node 2
A(61 to 66) : Generalized forces at node 2 in the local reference frame of the element
A(85) : Yield stress
A(86) : Cumulated equivalent plastic strain.
Tube element 1402 (SHAPE = 20 - Global models 21, 22, 23, 27, 28)
Stored data at the center of the element are the following:
A(1 to 6) : Generalized forces:
Nx, Ty, Tz, Mx, My, Mz
A(13) : Internal pressure
Stored data at each integration point are the following:
A( 7 to 12) : Generalized strains (axial, transverse shear, torsion, and bending strains)
A(13) : Threshold stress or equivalent generalized stress
A(14) : Generalized plastic strain
A(15) : Mean temperature in the section
A(17 to 22) : Generalized inelastic strains ( )
A(24 to 29) : Kinematic strain hardening variables
Tube element 1402 (SHAPE = 30 - Local models 1, 3, 7)
A( 1 to 6) : Generalized force:
A(31 to 45) : local variables: nH couples of values (a n, bn) then wo defining the radial
displacement as:
Note:
l nH is the number of harmonics, wo is the radial displacement due to
internal pressure
Stored data at each integration point are the following:

© 2019 ESI Group
A(13 to 14) : Temperature gradients along local y and z axes
A(15) : Temperature
A( 1 to 3) : Stresses
A( 4 to 6) : Inelastic strains ( )
A(7 to 9) : Not used

A(10) : Equivalent plastic strain
A(11 à 13) : Total mechanical strain
Viscoplasticity
Shell elements 2003, 2403, 2404, 2406 and 2408
The available modules are layered.
The mean value block contains the following data:
A( 1 to 8) Generalized forces:
:
A( 9 to 16) : Generalized strains:
A(26) : Time
A(27) : Element mean temperature
Models 1 and 2
A(17 to 24) : Generalized viscoplastic strains


© 2019 ESI Group
A( 6 to 10) : Viscoplastic strains
A(17) : Total equivalent viscoplastic strain
Model 21
Nxx, Nxy, Nyy, Mxx, Mxy, Myy Txz, Tyz
A(17 to 24) : Generalized viscoplastic strains

A( 6 to 10) : Viscoplastic strains
A(11 to 15) : Kinematic strain hardening variable
A(16) : Total equivalent viscoplastic strain
A(17) : Viscoplastic strain rate

A(18) : Isotropic memory variable q (with elastoplasticity (strain hardening) model n° 8)
A(19) : Viscous stress sv (with elastoplasticity (strain hardening) model n° 8)
A(21 to 25) : Second kinematic strain hardening variable (with elastoplasticity (strain
hardening) model n° 8)

© 2019 ESI Group
A(26 to 30) : Non-unit normal to the non-strain-hardening surface in the (visco) plastic
strain space (with elastoplasticity (strain hardening) model n° 8)
Tube element 1402 (SHAPE = 20 - Global models 101, 102)

Stored data et each integration point are the following:
A(13) : Equivalent generalized stress
A(15) : Mean temperature in the section
A(16) : Equivalent generalized creep strain
A(17 to 22) : Generalized inelastic strains ( )
Tube element 1402 (SHAPE = 30 - Local models 1, 2)
A( 1 to 6) : Generalized force:
A(31 to 45) : local variables: nH couples of values (a n, bn) then wo defining the radial
displacement as:
Note:
l nH is the number of harmonics, wo is the radial displacement due to
internal pressure
Stored data et each integration point are the following:
A(13 to 14) : Temperature gradients along local y and z axes
A(15) : Temperature

© 2019 ESI Group
A( 4 to 6) : Inelastic strains ( )
A(7 to 9) : Not used

A(11 à 13) : Total mechanical strain
User-Supplied Behavior Law

Only shell elements (2003, 2403, 2404 and 2408) accept a user-supplied behavior law. Global
or layered models can be used. Stored data depend on the labels associated with the
BEHAVIOUR command of the TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR procedure.
If the PLASTIC or UPDATED label is present, the stored data have the same structure as for
elastoplastic models. All mean values are imposed, and the following positions are reserved for
each integration point of the middle surface:
A(26 to 29) : Working positions.
:
If the LARGE label is present and the PLASTIC label absent, stored data have the same
structure as for elastic models using a total Lagrangian formulation. The following positions are
reserved:
A(26) : Time
A(27) : Mean temperature

© 2019 ESI Group
17.9.4 Two-Dimensional Option

The length of the block associated with the mean values or each integration point (lss) is
40 words. Block content is valid for all elements.
Elasticity
In the mean value block, only components 1 to 8, 15, 17, 21, 24 and 33 to 36 are stored. In
addition, the volume of the element is stored in the component 32.
A( 1 to 4) : Piola Kirchhoff stresses
A( 5 to 8) : Green Lagrange strains (excluding thermal strain)
A(15) : Temperature θ
A(16) : Time
A(17) : Modified density ρ0/ρ
A(20) : Young's modulus (thermoelasticity)
A(21) : Strain energy density
A(22 to 23) : Integration point coordinates
A(24) : Thermal strain εth
A(32) : Element volume
A(33 to 36) : Cauchy stresses
Modified updated Lagrangian formulation (hypoelasticity)

A( 1 to 4) : Cauchy stresses
A( 5 to 8) : Total strains (excluding thermal strain)
A(16) : Time

© 2019 ESI Group
Elasto-Plasticity
In the mean value block, only components 1 to 12, 15, 17, 21 and 24 are stored. In addition, the
volume of the element is stored in the component 32.
Models 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 11 and 12
A( 1 to 4) : A( 1 to 4) :Stresses
A( 5 to 8) : A( 5 to 8) :Total strains (excluding thermal strain)
A( 9 to 12) : Yield surface origin coordinates (kinematic strain hardening variable)
A(13) : Surface size (limit stress)

A(14) : Total equivalent plastic strain (by convention, this value becomes negative
during the Gauss point unloading)
A(16) : Time
A(17) : Modified density ρ0/ρ (modified Lagrangian formulation)
A(20) : Young's modulus (thermoplasticity, or with modified updated Lagrangian
formulation)
A(25 to 28) : Plastic strains

A(38) : Equivalent stress (σeq) read on the tensile curve for
Model 4
A( 5 to 8) : Total strain (excluding thermal strain)
A(13) : Yield surface size (limit stress)

© 2019 ESI Group
A(16) : Time
A(20) : Young's modulus (thermoplasticity or with modified updated Lagrangian
formulation)

A(33 to 36) : Stress
A(37) : Damage parameter

A(39) : Density ratio with respect to non-damaged state (ρ)
Model 5
A( 5 to 8) : Total strain (excluding thermal strain)
A( 9 to 12) : Yield surface origin coordinates

A(13) : Surface size (limit stress)


© 2019 ESI Group
A(29 to 32) : Vector normal to the yield surface

A(33) : Number of half cycle + n (Ramberg - Osgood coefficient)
A(34) : Total equivalent plastic strain for last half cycle
A(35) : K (Ramberg - Osgood coefficient)
A(36) : Equivalent stress for last half cycle
A(37) : Plastic strain for step below G.
A(40) : Max. cyclic unidirectional strain ∆ε
Model 8
The information stored for an integration point comprise the same components (1 to 28) as for
models 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7, plus the following components:
A(29 - 32) : Second kinematic variable
A(33 - 36) : Non-unit normal to the non-strain-hardening surface in the (visco) plastic
strain space

A(39) : Isotropic variable of the non-strain-hardening surface in the (visco) plastic strain
space (q)
A(40) : Max. single axis cyclic strain (Q)
Models 9, 10 and 13
A( 5 to 8) : Total strains (excluding thermal stains)
A( 9 to 12) : Yield surface origin coordinates (kinematic strain hardening variable -
models 9 and 13 only)
A(13) : Yield stress k (model 9)

or σ1 (model 10)
or (model 13)

© 2019 ESI Group
A(16) : Time
A(18) : Mean plastic strain
A(19) : Porosity f
A(38) : Equivalent kinematic strain hardening variable (models 9 and 13)
A(39) : Mean kinematic strain hardening variable (models 9 and 13)

A(40) :
Model 14
A( 5 to 8) : Total strains (excluding thermal strains)
A(16) : Time
A(19) : Porosity f
A(38) : Equivalent stress (seq) read on the tensile curve for

A(40) :
Viscoplasticity
In the mean value block, only components 1 to 12, 15, 17, 21 and 24 are stored. In addition,
the volume of the element is stored in the component 32.

© 2019 ESI Group
Models 1, 2 and 41
A(16) : Time
A(18) : Total equivalent viscoplastic strain (by convention, this value becomes
negative during the Gauss point unloading)

formulation)
A(25 to 28) : Viscoplastic strains
or inelastic strains where these models are interactive with a plasticity model
A(32 : Element volume

Models 21, 51
A( 9 to 12) : Yield surface origin coordinates (kinematic strain hardening variable)
A(13) : Surface size (yield stress)


© 2019 ESI Group
A(16) : Time
A(18) : Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate
A(19) : Viscous stress

formulation)

Model 61
A(16) : Time


Model 71

© 2019 ESI Group

A(16) : Time
A(18) : Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate

formulation)
A(25 to 28) : :Viscoplastic strains

A(38) : Damage
Viscoelasticity
In the mean value block, only components 1 to 8, 15, 21 and 24 are stored. In addition, the
Model 11
A(16) : Time
A(20) : Young's modulus
A(25 to 28) : Components of stress deviator associated with 1st element of Maxwell model.

© 2019 ESI Group
A(29 to 32) : Components of stress deviator for 2nd element

A(33 to 36) : Components of stress deviator for 3rd element
A(37 to 40) : Components of stress deviator for 4th element
Model 12
A( 9 to 14) : "Fictitious temperature" qf associated with each of the six MAXWELL
elements
A(16) : Time
A(17 to 20) : Mean stress (or pressure) associated with each of the four MAXWELL elements
A(25 to 28) : Components of stress deviator associated with 1st element of Maxwell model.
Hyperelasticity
In the mean value block, only components 1 to 8, 17, 21 and 33 to 36 are stored. In addition,
the volume of the element is stored in the component 32.
A( 1 to 4) : Piola Kirchhoff stresses
A( 5 to 8) : Green Lagrange strains (excluding thermal strain)
A(16) : Time

© 2019 ESI Group
Modified updated Lagrangian formulation

A( 5 to 8) : Total strains
A(16) : Time
A(17) : Modified densityρ0/ρ
User Behavior Law

The information stored depends on the labels associated with the BEHAVIOR command of the
TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR procedure. The following positions in the block corresponding
to each integration point are imposed:
A(15) : Temperature
A(16) : Time
A(17) : Modified density ρ0/ρ (modified updated Lagrangian formulation)
A(24) : Thermal strain

© 2019 ESI Group
17.9.5 Three-Dimensional Option

Block length for mean values and each integration point (lss) is 60 words. Block content is
valid for all elements.
Elasticity
In the mean value block, only components 1 to 12, 21, 25, 30, 35 and 49 to 54 are stored. In
A(1 to 6) : Piola Kirchhoff stresses
A(7 to 12) : Green Lagrange strains (excluding thermal strain)
A(22) : Time
Modified updated Lagrangian formulation (hypoelasticity)

A(7 to 12) : Total strains (excluding thermal strain)
A(22) : Time

© 2019 ESI Group
Elasto-Plasticity
Models 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 11 and 12
A(1 to 6) : Stresses
A(7 to 12) : Total strains (excluding thermal strains)
A(13 to 18) : Yield surface origin coordinates (kinematic strain hardening variable)

A(22) : Time
formulation)

Model 4
A(19) : Yield surface size (yield stress)

© 2019 ESI Group
A(22) : Time
A(25) : Modified density r0/r (modified Lagrangian formulation)
formulation)
A(37 to 42) : A(37 to 42):Plastic strains

A(55) : Damage parameter

A(56) : Density ratio with respect to undamaged state (r)
Model 5
A(13 to 18) Yield surface origin coordinates



© 2019 ESI Group
A(43 to 48) : Vector normal to yield surface

A(49) : Number of half cycle + n (Ramberg - Osgood coefficient)
A(50) : Total equivalent plastic strain for last half cycle
A(51) : K (Ramberg - Osgood coefficient)
A(52) : Equivalent stress for last half cycle
A(53) : Plastic strain for step below G.
A(55) : Unidirectional strain for larger half cycle
Model 8
The information stored for an integration point comprises the same components (1 to 42) as for
models 1, 2, 3, 6 and 7, plus the following components:
A(43 to 48) : Second kinematic variable
A(49 to 54) : Non-unit normal to non-strain-hardening surface (visco) plastic strain space
A(59) : Isotropic memory variable (q)

A(60) : Saturated value of isotropic variable (Q)
Models 9, 10 and 13
A(13 to 18) : Yield surface origin coordinates (kinematic strain hardening variable -
models 9 and 13 only)
A(19) : Yield stress k (model 9)

or s1 (model 10)
or (model 13)

© 2019 ESI Group
A(22) : Time
A(24) : Equivalent kinematic strain hardening variable (models 9 and 13)
A(25) : Mean kinematic strain hardening variable cm (models 9 and 13)

A(26) : Mean plastic strain
A(27) : Porosity f
A(60) :
Model 14
A(22) : Time
A(27) : Porosity f
A(60) :

© 2019 ESI Group
Viscoplasticity
Models 1 ,2 and 41
A(22) : Time
A(25) : Modified density r0/r (modified Lagrangian formulation)

formulation)
A(37 to 42) : Viscopastic strains
or inelastic strains where these models are interactive with a plasticity model

Model 21
A(13 to 18) : Yield surface origin coordinates (kinematic strain hardening variable)

© 2019 ESI Group
A(22) : Time
A(24): : Equivalent stress (seq) read on the tensile curve for
A(26) :
Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate

formulation)

Model 61
A( 1 to 6) : A( 1 to 6) :Stresses
A( 7 to 12) : A( 7 to 12) :Total strains (excluding thermal strains)
A(22) : Time
A(26) : A(26):Total equivalent viscoplastic strain (by convention, this value
becomes negative during the Gauss point unloading)

A(37 to 42) : A(37 to 42):Viscoplastic strains

© 2019 ESI Group
Model 71

A(22) : Time
A(26) :
Equivalent viscoplastic strain rate

formulation)
A(37 to 42) : A(37 to 42):Viscoplastic strains

A(59) : Damage
Viscoelasticity
In the mean value block, only components 1 to 12, 21, 30 and 35 are stored. In addition, the
Model 11

© 2019 ESI Group
A(22) : Time
A(37 to 42) : Components of stress deviator associated with 1st element of Maxwell
model
Model 12
A(13 to 18) : "Fictitious temperature" qf associated with each of the six MAXWELL
elements
A(22) : Time
A(26 to 29) : Mean stress (or pressure) associated with each of the four MAXWELL elements
A(37 to 42) : Components of stress deviator associated with 1st element of MAXWELL model
Hyperelasticity
In the mean value block, only components 1 to 12, 21, 25, 30 and 49 to 54 are stored. In
A( 1 to 6) : PiolaKirchhoff stresses
A( 7 to 12) : Green Lagrange strains (excluding thermal strains)

© 2019 ESI Group
A(22) : Time
A(49 to 54) : Cauchy strains
Modified updated Lagrangian formulation

A(22) : Time
User Behavior Law

Information stored depends on the labels associated with the BEHAVIOUR command of the
TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR procedure. The following positions in the block for each
integration point are imposed:
A(21) : Temperature
A(22) : Time
A(25) : Modified density ρ0/ρ (modified updated Lagrangian formulation)
A(35) : Thermal strain

© 2019 ESI Group
17.9.6 COQ8 Three-Dimensional Shell Option

Block length (mean values on element or mean values on the layer for each integration point i in
the thickness) is 60 words.
a) Mean values on element
B( 1 to 6) : stress tensor
B( 7 to 12) : strains (total - thermal)
B(13 to 18) : not used
B(19) : surface size (yield stress)
B(20) : total equivalent plastic strain
B(21) : temperature
B(22) : time
B(28) : Young's modulus (at computation temperature)
B(29) : not used
B(30) : strain energy
B(37 to 42) : plastic strains
B(43 to 48) : creep strains
B(49 to 54) : thermal strains
B(55 to 60) : bending and membrane stresses
b) Mean values on the laminate at integration point i in the thickness
B( 1 to 6) : stress tensor at integration point
B(19) : surface size (yield stress)
B(21) : temperature
B(22) : time
B(23) : not used
B(24) : equivalent stress
B(31 to 33) : integration point coordinates

© 2019 ESI Group
17.9.7 COQD Axisymmetrical Harmonic Shell Option

The structure for a record containing forces corresponding to a load card is as follows:
There are no mean values on the element with this option.

B( 1 to 4) : stress tensor at integration point
B( 5) : equivalent stress
B(25) : temperature at integration point
B(26) : Young's modulus (at current computation temperature)
B(27) : thickness

© 2019 ESI Group
17.9.8 COQT Thermal Shell Option

The TRANSIENT file created after THERMAL SHELL TRANSIENT analysis contains three
types of result for each card (the names of which are taken by analogy with mechanical
analysis).
Type 1:
Nature: DISPLACEMENT
Content: Mean temperature at nodes (first generalized coordinate)
Record length: 1
Number of records: number of nodes
Type 2:
Nature: VELOCITY
Content:
Temperature gradient at nodes
T2 : 2nd generalized coordinate

h :thickness of the shell
Record length: 1
Type 3:
Nature: ACCELERATION
Content: Others generalized coordinates at nodes (Legendre polynomial coefficients)
Record length: maximum degree of Legendre polynomials -2

© 2019 ESI Group
17.10 References
17.10 REFERENCES
Behavior of materials
l Lemaitre, J. and Chaboche, J.L. Mechanics of Solid Materials, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge, 1989
Non-linear elasticity and hyperelasticity
l Ciarlet, P.G. , Mathematical Elasticity, North-Holland Publishing Co., 1988
l Ogden, R.W. “Large Deformation Isotropic Elasticity : On the Correlation of Theory and
Experiment for Incompressible Rubberlike Solids”, Proc. Royal Society, Vol A, pp 565 - 584, 1972
l Ogden, R.W. “Elastic deformations in Rubberlike Solids”,Mechanics of Solids,, pp 499 - 537, 1982
l Ogden, R.W. Nonlinear Elastic Deformations, Ellis Horwood Ltd., West Sussex, England, 1984
Elasto-plasticity and elasto-viscoplasticity
l Armstrong, P.J. ans Frederick, C.O., “A Mathematical Representation of the Multiaxial Baushinger
Effect”, CEGB Report RD/B/N 731, 1966
l Chaboche, J.L. and Rousselier, G., “On the Plastic and Viscoplastic Constitutive Equations - Part I :
Rules Developed With Internal Variable Concept”, Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology, Vol.
105, pp 153 - 158, 1983
l Chaboche, J.L. and Rousselier, G., “On the Plastic and Viscoplastic Constitutive Equations - Part II :
Application of the Internal Variable Concepts to the 316 Stainless Steel”, Journal of Pressure Vessel
Technology, Vol. 105, pp 159 - 164, 1983
l Chaboche, J.L., “Time - Independent Constitutive Theories for Cyclic Plasticity”, International
Journal of Plasticity, Vol. 2, N°2, pp 149 - 188, 1986
l Edelman, F., Drucker, D., “Some Extensions to Elementary Plasticity Theory”, Journal of Franklin
Institute, Vol. 251, p 581, 1951
l Eisenberg, M.A., “A Generalization of Plastic Flow Theory With Application to Cyclic Hardening
and Softening Phenomena”, Journal of Engineering Materials and Technology, 1976
l Halphen, B., Nguyen, Q.S., “Sur les Matériaux Standards Généralisés”, Journal de Mécanique, Vol.
14, p 39, 1975
l Hill, R., The Mathematical Theory of Plasticity, The Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1950-1971
l Kachanov, L. M., Foundations of the Theory of Plasticity, North-Holland Publishing Company,
Amsterdam, 1971
l Mandel, J., Plasticité et Viscoplasticité, Cours C.I.S.M. Udine, Springer-Verlag,, Berlin, 1971
l Mc Dowell, D., Moosbrugger, J., “A Generalized Rate-dependent Bounding Surface Model”,
Advances in Piping Analysis and Life Assessment for Pressure Vessels and Piping,, P.N.P., Vol.
129, ASME, p 1, 1987
l Moreau, J.-J., “Sur les Lois de Frottement, de Viscosité et de Plasticité”, C.R. Acad. Sciences Paris,
Vol. 271, p. 608, 1970

© 2019 ESI Group
17.10 References
l Mroz, Z., “On the Description of Anisotropic Workhardening”, Journal Mec. Phys. Sol., Vol. 15, p
163, 1967
l Odqvist, F.K.G., Mathematical Theory of Creep and Creep Rupture, The Clarendon Press, Oxford,
1974
l Oytana C. et al., “Constitutive Equations Study in Biaxial Stress Experiments”, Journal Eng. Mat.
Technol., Vol. 104, p. 1, 1982
l Prager, W., Problèmes de Plasticité Théorique, Dunod, Paris, 1958
l Rabotnov, Y.N., Creep Problems in Structural Members, North-Holland Publishing Company,
Amsterdam, 1969
Elasto plasticity interacting with ductile damage
l Devaux, J., Leblond J.B., Mottet, G., Perrin, G. “Some New Applications of Damage Models for
Ductile Metals”, symposium on the Promotion of Application of Local Fracture Damage Models to
Engineering Fracture Problems, Tempe, Arizona, 1992
l Gurson, A.L. “Plastic Flow and Fracture Behavior of Ductile Materials Incorporating Void
Nucleation, Growth and Interaction”, PhD Thesis, Brown University, 1975
l Gurson, A.L. “Continuum Theory of Ductile Rupture by Void Nucleation and Growth : Part I -
Yield Criteria and Flow Rules for Porous Ductile Media””, ASME Journal of Engineering Materials
and Technology, Vol 99, PP 2 - 15, 1977
l Leblond, J.B., Perrin, G. and Devaux, J. “Strain Hardening versus Damage Softening in Porous
Ductile Metals”, submitted to European Journal of Mechanics and Solids
l Perrin, G. “Contribution à l’Etude Théorique et Numérique de la Rupture Ductile des Métaux”,
Thèse de Docteur de l’Ecole Polytechnique - Spécialité Mecanique, 1992
l Rice, J.R., Tracey, D.M. “On the Ductile Enlargement of Voids in Triaxial Stress Fields”, Journal of
the Mechanics and Physics of Solids, Vol 17, pp 201 - 217, 1979
l Rousselier, G. “Finite Deformation Constitutive Relations Including Ductile Fracture Damage”,
Three-dimensional Constitutive Relations and Ductile Fracture, North-Holland Publishing Co., pp
331 - 355, 1981
l Rousselier, G., Devaux, J.C., Mottet, G. and Devesa, G. “A Methodology for Ductile Fracture
Analysis Based on Damage Mechanics : an Illustration of a Local Approach of Fracture”, Nonlinear
Fracture Mechanics : Vol II - Elastic-Plastic Fracture, ASTM STP 995, J.D. Landes, A. Saxena, and
J.G. Merkle, Eds, American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, 31 (8), pp 332 - 354,
1989
l Tvergaard, V. “Material Failure by Void Growth to Coalescence”, Advances in Applied Mechanics,
Vol 27, pp 83 - 151, 1990
Viscoelasticity
l Kabanemi, K.K., Crochet, M.J., International Journal of Polymer Processing, 7, pp 60 - 70, 1992
l Narayanaswamy, O.S., “A Model of Structural Relaxation in Glass”, Journal of the American
Ceramic Society, Vol 54, n°10, 1971

© 2019 ESI Group
17.10 References
l Markovsky, A., Soules, T.F., Vukcevich, M.R., Chen, V. “Mathematical and Computational
Aspects of a General Viscoelastic Theory”, Journal of Rheology, 31 (8), pp 785 - 813 , 1987
l Sherer, G.W. and Rekhson, S.M. “Viscoelastic - Elastic Composites”, part I,, Journal of the
American Ceramic Society, vol. 65 n°7, 1982
l Sherer, G.W. and Rekhson, S.M. “Viscoelastic - Elastic Composites”, part II,, Journal of the
l Sherer, G.W. and Rekhson, S.M. “Viscoelastic - Elastic Composites”, part III,, Journal of the
SHE8 and SHED elements
l Carnoy, E., Panosyan, G. “Numerical Method in Buckling Analysis of Elasto-plastic Thin Shell
Structures”, Third International Colloquium on Stability of Metal Structures, Paris, 1983
l Carnoy, G. and Panosyan G. “Approximation of the Plastic Buckling Load as the Solution of an
Eigenvalue Problem”, Nuclear Engineering and Design, Vol. 78, N°3, 1984
l Hughes, T.J.R. and Liu, W.K. “Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Shells - Part I: Three-
dimensional shells”, Computer Method in Applied Mechanics and Engineering 26, pp 331 - 362,
1981
l Hughes, T.J.R. and Liu, W.K. “Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Shells - Part II: Two-
dimensional shells”, Computer Method in Applied Mechanics and Engineering 27, pp 167 - 181,
1981
l Nyssen, C. “An Efficient and Accurate Iterative Method, allowing Large Incremental Steps, to solve
elasto-plastic problems”, Computers and Structures, Vol. 13, pp 63 - 71, 1981
l Panosyan, G., Beziat, J., Carnoy, E. “Finite Element Computations Involving Creep Combined With
Other Nonlinearities”, 7th SMIRT, Chicago, 1983

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 18 COMMON BLOCKS
18.1 Blank Common

In order to write subroutines defining user-specified elements (described in section 8.8), it is
necessary to know the contents of some COMMON blocks.
18.1 BLANK COMMON

Blank common holds various codes characterizing the problem to be analyzed which are
essential to the operation of the system, and is of the form :
COMMON PAGE (80), KDEBT (20), NCODE (20), LCODE (40).
The content of the array PAGE (80) depends upon the computer used, and need not be
described here. The contents of the subsequent arrays are printed by the routine DEFINITION
or by the command EXTRACT CODES.
Control codes
The codes are described in the following tables.

© 2019 ESI Group
18.1 Blank Common
KDEBT (20)
NCODE (20)

© 2019 ESI Group
18.1 Blank Common
LCODE (40)

© 2019 ESI Group
18.1 Blank Common

© 2019 ESI Group
18.2 Common COMAIL
18.2 COMMON COMAIL

The labeled common block / COMAIL / contains data relative to the element currently being
analyzed, and is 67 words in length.

© 2019 ESI Group
18.3 Common COMMAT and COMMIL
18.3 COMMON COMMAT AND COMMIL

The labeled common block / COMMAT / contains data relative to the properties of material:
l IMAT: material number,
l CMAT (200): values of the material properties (real values)

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group
e.m : Electromagnetism
The labeled common block /COMMIL/ contains data relative to media properties.
l medium number
l CMIL (100) : values of the medium properties

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group
18.4 Common COMTRA
18.4 COMMON COMTRA

The labeled common block / COMTRA / contains data relative to transient analysis and is
20 words in length.

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 19 RIK'S METHOD
19.1 General

19.1 GENERAL
Rik's method is an algorithm used to solve equilibrium equations and to increment the load
automatically. It is specially adapted for buckling analysis.
The method is available under the commands TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR and
TRANSIENT SHELL.
The method is based on proportional loading of the structure, that is to say :
f = λ P + fo
where:
fo is the initial load vector
P is the reference load vector
λ is a scalar, named loading parameter.
There are three kinds of incrementation. We describe them below.

© 2019 ESI Group
19.2 Constant Arc-Length Incrementation
19.2 CONSTANT ARC-LENGTH INCREMENTATION

The load increments are defined by a constant arc-length in the load-displacement graph. We
can apply four processes with this type of incrementation.
First process
The arc-length is only imposed for the first iteration of the solution process. We then search for
the solution point in a normal direction to the initial tangent (first method: constant arc-length
following the initial tangent).
Constant arc-length incrementation (method 1)

∆S = arc-length
λo = initial load (or initial amplitude)
q = i ndicates one displacement component or the normalized displacement vector (expressed
without dimension)
Second process
The arc-length is only imposed for the first iteration. We then search for the solution point
following a normal direction to the secant updated at each iteration (method 2: constant arc-
length following the initial tangent and updating of the normal).

© 2019 ESI Group

∆S = MoM1 arc-length
Third process
The arc-length is imposed at each equilibrium iteration; we search for the solution point
following a circle arc on the graph λ - q (method 3 : constant arc length at each iteration).

Fourth process
The displacement vector norm is imposed as constant at each iteration. We search for the
solution point following a vertical direction on the graph λ - q (method 4 : constant
displacement vector norm at each iteration).

© 2019 ESI Group

The highest order methods (3 or 4) are the more efficient for dealing with structures whose
behavior is characterized by a high slope near the point of instability (in the load-displacement
graph).

© 2019 ESI Group
19.3 Variable Arc-Length Incrementation: Arc-Length Updated at Each Increment
19.3 VARIABLE ARC-LENGTH INCREMENTATION:

ARC-LENGTH UPDATED AT EACH INCREMENT
The arc-length ∆s is updated at each increment according to a characteristic parameter. This
parameter may be:
l either the number of iterations; the new arc-length is then defined by :
n is the number of iterations obtained at the previous increment, and is the desired number of
iterations (CRISFIELD method).
l the variation of the BERGAN's parameter, BERGAN's parameter Sp characterizes the global
stiffness behavior of the structure.
If Sp > 1 the structure becomes stiffer
If Sp < 1 the structure becomes softer
Sp = 0 at a limit point
Sp < 0 beyond a first limit point, and more generally if the slope, on the load-displacement
graph, is negative.
The new arc-length is then defined by the relation:
∆Sp is the variation of BERGAN's parameter between the two-previous increments, is

the desired variation (BERGAN method).

© 2019 ESI Group
19.4 Variable Arc-Length Incrementation associated with a Buckling Calculation
19.4 VARIABLE ARC-LENGTH INCREMENTATION

ASSOCIATED WITH A BUCKLING CALCULATION
The interest of the method is the possibility of obtaining a good approximation of the limit load
in a few increments.
The calculation of the first step is made as in the case of constant arc-length incrementation.
The calculation of the following steps is associated with a buckling calculation. The amplitude
of load step ∆λ is defined by the smallest positive eigenvalue of the linearized bifurcation
problem.
KT q = ∆λ . S . q
Where
S = Kσ + Kp + KM in a general form
KT : tangent stiffness matrix
Kσ : geometric stiffness matrix
Kp : stiffness matrix due to pressure load variation
KM : material stiffness due to the non-linear behavior of the material
This process is applied at each increment so long the system remains stable (positive
eigenvalues).
When the instability occurs (limit point reached, for example), the program applies the constant
arc-length incrementation method in the case of a limit point type of buckling, or stops in the
case of a bifurcation point.
Variable arc-length incrementation associated with a buckling calculation.

© 2019 ESI Group
19.5 Note
19.5 NOTE
l Under the command TRANSIENT NON-LINEAR, the four methods of the constant arc-length
incrementation and the updated arc-length incrementation arc available.
l Under TRANSIENT SHELL, only the first method of the arc-length incrementation is available, as
well as the variable arc-length incrementation associated with a buckling calculation.

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 20 SECTION MANAGEMENT DATABASE
CHAPTER 20 SECTION MANAGEMENT

DATABASE
A program dedicated to the section database management is available and is described in the
Beam Tool Manual. It is used to visualize the profiler in the space. It gives the torsion center of
the shaped and allows a graphical post processing of the stresses in all the points.
For simple or standard section, the section properties and the stresses in determinate points can
be defined automatically (Chapter 13.10.3).

© 2019 ESI Group
20.1 Simple Database Section
20.1 SIMPLE DATABASE SECTION

They are three:
1. plate shapes associated with label PLATE followed byL = length and H = height
2. Pipes associated with label PIPE followed byDE = external diameter and E = thickness
3. Hollow rectangles associated with label RECTANGLE followed byL1, E1, L2, E2

© 2019 ESI Group
20.2 Standard Database Section
20.2 STANDARD DATABASE SECTION

We speak about shaped contained into "PRODFRENCH IRON AND STEEL PRODUCTS "
– O.T.U.A edition 1989. An exhaustive list is given in the Beam Tool Manual.
The files containing the properties of the standard profiles can be provided during the program
installation and can be affected to the program by the environnement variable SSP_BD
(§1.1.10).
Their standard name is:
l standard _nf_mm.pf (model in mm)
l standard_nf_m.pf (model in m).
Example : model in meter
DEFINITION
:
:
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
CONSTANT E 2.* 11 NU 0.3 RHO 7800.
UNIT 1 MAXI 2
; ratio between model unit and base unit (optional default)
; maximum number of used profiler section (optional.default 20)
;
SECTION 1 PIPE 0.5 0.05 (ROD 0.001)
SECTION 2 TYPE NF.IPE.80.m BASIS
M 1 / SECTION 1
M 2 / SECTION 2
CONSTRAINT
:
LOAD
1 ACCEL.X / GX 1.
2 ACCEL.Y / GY 1.
RETURN
SOLVE
SAVE DATA RESULTS 1

© 2019 ESI Group
Stresses computation at standard points (Chapter.13.10.3)
SEARCH DATA FORCES 1

STRESS PROFILES
UNIT 1. MAXI 2 (optional)
SECTION 1 PIPE 0.5 0.05 (ROD 0.001)
SECTION 2 TYPE NF.IPE.80.m BASIS
SELECT ELEMENTS 1 2
LOADS 1 2
RETURN
Notes:
l The ROD optional label permits to the pipe not to behave as a beam but as a ROD working only in
traction-compression (σ = N/S). However the ROD degrees of freedom will be stabilized (inertia
multiplied there by 0.001)
l Position of sections
Each section in the database (or PLATE or RECTANGLE) is defined relative to standard axes YREF
and ZREF.
Standard axes in standard database:
l I or H or T YREF parallel to flanges
l L (with equal flanges or not) YREF parallel to smallest side
l U YREF parallel to flanges
l PLATE or RECTANGLE YREF parallel to longest side
l ZREF is obtain from YREF rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Without the given angle φ (described further on), YREF is located on y local axis of beam (cf.
Chapter 16.2.1):

© 2019 ESI Group
Rotation of YREF around the beam axis is possible in the same way as in 8.2.4.3.3 by using:
l the PHI angle
l a third point (KX KY KZ or NODE)
In the case of L section, YREF-ZREF are not on the principal inertia axes. The q angle read in
database is always a positive value and will be added or subtracted by SYSTUS to j angle to
properly define YREF. For a single definition of q angle there are two possibilities to define the
section on each side of YREF selected by the sign of the number n associated to SECTION
commands during the affectation to the elements.

© 2019 ESI Group

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 21 LINEAR EQUATION SOLVERS
21.1 Introduction

21.1 INTRODUCTION
The computation modulus (SOLVE, CALCULATE, DYNAMIC, TRANSIENT) have linear
equation solvers by default. The command METHOD is used to choose, eventually, a
resolution method more suitable to the treated problem (computation time, memory size or disk).
This chapter introduces the modulus where the command METHOD is available, the command
syntaxes, and the main properties of the equation solvers associated with the command
METHOD.
1- STATIC RESOLUTION
SOLVE METHOD …
2- TRANSIENT RESOLUTION (see Chapter 21.4)
TRANSIENT (LINEAR, ELASTIC, THERMIC or NON LINEAR)

METHOD …
3- SEARCH OF EIGEN MODES (see Chapter 21.4)
DYNAMIC
MODE (SUBSPACE ITERATIVE, SUBSPACE BLOCK, INVERSE POWER )
METHOD …
4- STURM SEQUENCE (see Chapter 21.4)
DYNAMIC
STURM SEQUENCE METHOD…
5- GUYAN REDUCTION
5-1: Formation of reduced matrixes
DYNAMIC
MODE SUBSPACE (GUYAN) REDUCTION
METHOD …

© 2019 ESI Group
21.1 Introduction
5-2: Computation of eigenmodes with Guyan selection
DYNAMIC
MODE SUBSPACE GUYAN …
SELECT …
METHOD …
6- HARMONIC RESPONSE - DIRECT METHOD

6-1: Without damping
DYNAMIC
HARMONIC RESPONSE
METHOD…
6-2: With damping
DYNAMIC
HARMONIC RESPONSE
DAMPING
METHOD COMPLEX
This problem is the only one which requires a complex solver.

© 2019 ESI Group
21.2 Characteristics
21.2 CHARACTERISTICS
The METHOD command is used to apply two types of solvers:
l standard solvers,
l external solvers. That means non produced by ESI Group.
21.2.1 Standard Solvers

Standard solvers can be used whatever the platform used:
They are of major types:
l direct solvers,
l iterative solvers.
Sky Line Solvers

These solvers help to solve the linear systems directly.
They require a complete triangulation of the matrix, assembled with SKY LINE (BAND)
method. In order to optimize the resolution, an internal reordering of the nodes is possible (see
§21.3.3.1).
These solvers are existed for the symmetrical or not, the real or complex matrixes:
- DIRECT solver for symmetrical real matrixes
It requires a complete Gauss triangulation (K=LDLT).
It is used to process all the SYMMETRICAL REAL matrixes.
- DIRECT solver for non-symmetrical real matrixes
This requires a complete Gaussian triangulation L.U (K=L.U).
It is used to process all the REAL matrixes.
- DIRECT solver for symmetrical complex matrixes
It requires a complete Gauss triangulation (K=LDLT).
It is used to process all the SYMMETRICAL COMPLEX matrixes
- DIRECT solver for non-symmetrical complex matrixes
This requires a complete Gaussian triangulation L.U (K=L.U).
It is used to process all the COMPLEX matrixes.
Note:
l Direct sky line solvers are parallelized.

© 2019 ESI Group
Standard Sparse Solvers

These solvers require a sparse stocking complete factorization (direct solvers) or incomplete
(iterative solvers) of the matrixes: it is necessary to execute iterations (internal to the resolution
of the linear system). The essential advantage of this type of iterative solver is the reduction in
memory requirements during resolution. The saving of computation time depends on the matrix
conditioning and on the load numbers of the problem. To optimize the resolution, a reordering
of nodes is necessary for the direct solver. An internal reordering of nodes is possible (see
21.3.3.1).
These solvers are existed for the symmetrical or not, the real or complex matrixes:
- Direct or iterative sparse solver for symmetrical real matrixes.
This requires a complete or incomplete Choleski factorization (K=L.LT)
It is used for processing all the POSITIVE DEFINED SYMMETRICAL REAL matrixes.
- Direct or iterative sparse solver for non-symmetrical real matrixes.
This requires a complete or incomplete L.U (K=L.U) triangulation
It is used to process all REAL matrixes.
- Direct or iterative sparse solver for symmetrical complex matrixes.
This requires a complete or incomplete Choleski factorization (K=L.LT)
It is used for processing all the SYMMETRICAL COMPLEX matrixes.
- Direct or iterative sparse solver for non- symmetrical complex matrixes.
This requires a complete L.U (K=L.U) triangulation
It is used to process all COMPLEX matrixes.

© 2019 ESI Group
21.2.2 External Solvers

Computer specific solvers can be used on optimized or parallel platforms only.
In the way they are designed, these solvers increase the performance of the resolutions.
These types of solver are available on the following platforms:
l Windows,
l Linux
The MKL solver is of direct type and allow, as well as standard solvers, for processing positive
defined symmetrical real matrices and non-symmetrical real matrices.
21.2.3 Summary Table of Solvers Properties
Diagonal
Symmetrical
Symmetrical Real Complex access
Solver complex Parallel
real matrix matrix matrix (RIKS)
matrix
(STURM)
Skyline All All All All YES YES
Direct sparse NO1
Iterative Positive All All All NO
NO2
sparse defined
MKL All All All All YES YES
1The access to the diagonal of Gauss factorization (the using of Sturm sequences and some RIKS methods) is
possible using the non symmetrical sparse method.
2The obtained values can be useless using the incomplete factorization of the iterative methods.

© 2019 ESI Group
21.3 Input Data
21.3 INPUT DATA

These solvers are applied by the METHOD command. (see Chapter 21.1)
21.3.1 Type
The type of solver is given by the following label:
Standard Solvers
(SKY LINE) direct standard solver
SPARSE DIRECT direct sparse solver
(SPARE)
iterative sparse solver
ITERATIve
Computer Specific Solvers

The more efficient solver is selected, mainly MKL. (SPARSE for
OPTIMISED
the standard platform for which no optimized solver is existed).
21.3.2 Properties
(SYMMETRICAL) symmetrical matrix (default)
NON
non symmetrical matrix
SYMMETRICAL
(REAL) real matrix (default)
COMPLEX complex matrix ( only standard solvers)

© 2019 ESI Group
21.3 Input Data
21.3.3 Parameters
They depend on chosen solver types.
Direct Standard Solvers

for SKY LINE
renumbering method
ORDER r r ¹ 0 inverse Kuthill Mac Kee method
otherwise no internal renumbering (default)
for DIRECT (SPARSE)
r = 1 Kuthill Mac Kee
ORDER r r = 2 Metis (default)
r = 3 No internal renumbering
Iterative Standard Solvers

for ITERATIVE SPARSE
r = 1 Kuthill Mac Kee
ORDER r r = 2 Metis
r = 3 No internal renumbering (default)
(PRECISION (ABSOLUTE) p)
precision of the internal iterative resolution of the linear system. This
precision is relative to a displacement.
By default, with TRANSIENT NON LINEAR p= p'/2
Where p' is the precision of the resolution of the non-linear system for
displacement (cf. 12.4.3.2, command PRECISION FORCE f
DISPLACEMENT p').
By default, with the SOLVE procedure (cf. 9.3.3), p=10-7.
The relative precision is computed accordingly the results of the 1st
iteration.
n: maximum number of iterations (default a quarter of the degrees of
(NUMBER n)
freedom number).
ADD a a: number of terms to add per line (default a = 0)
Note:
l So for all iterative methods, the residues in force must be verified and compared to the nodal forces of
the considered load.

© 2019 ESI Group
21.3 Input Data
External Solver (OPTIMISED Label)

for OPTIMISED
MKL
ORDER r r = 1 : « Minimum Degree »
r = 2 : « Nested Dissection (METIS)» (default)
r = 3 : « Nested Dissection (OpenMP)»
21.3.4 Extract Labels for the Treatment

TEST n or EXTRACT n
Extract level
n = 0 no extract
n = 1 minimum extract
n = 2 extracts in great number
n = 3 extract of second member vectors and rotation
n = 4 extract of matrix
TEST label is used with SOLVE label (EXTRACT has another using).
TEST or EXTRACT label is used with the others commands.

© 2019 ESI Group
21.4 Notes
21.4 NOTES
For a NON LINEAR TRANSIENT (Chapter 21.2), the matrix to be treated can be non defined
positive (for example: post buckling).
For the eigenmodes research (Chapter 21.3):
l only the direct methods are available beyond some frequencies,
l if frequencies are searched around a central frequency (generally upper to the first eigenfrequencie),
the symmetric matrix is not defined as positive.
l If a frequency of a pre -stress structure is researched (label SUMMATION) the symmetric matrix
can be non defined as positive (load upper than the buckling load).
For Sturm sequencies (Chapter 21.1.4), only the Gauss direct methods are available (K =
LDLT) due to the diagonal matrix D using.
Notes:
l For the computer specific solvers, the D matrix is not always available.
l If the D matrix is not available, the STURM label on the command VECTOR can't be used.

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 22 SPACE TRANSFORMATIONS
22.1 Introduction

22.1 INTRODUCTION
A new method for the simulation of problems with open boundaries is proposed in SYSTUS.
This is the "space transformation" method.
Principle:
With a geometric transformation (t), "infinite" space ext is transformed to a "finite" space (Wtr).
The finite space is then modeled (meshing and computation).
Ωtr = τ (Ωext) : Ωtr finite transformed space of infinite

Ωint = τ (Ωint) : internal space (not affected by transformation ) τ
Γint = τ (Γint ) : interface Γint between Ωint and Ωext not affected by transformation τ
Γext = τ (∞) : Γext is the edge corresponding to transformed infinity.
Input data:
The space transformation is described in the material properties of the elements concerned.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
E (list) / (material properties) (transformation properties)
Transformation material properties:

TRANSF kji : transformation type
XCEN xc YCEN yc ZCEN zc: transformation center
XINT xi YINT yi ZINT zi: Γint edge position
XEXT xe YEXT ye ZEXT ze: Γext edge position
XCOE xe YCOE ye ZCOE ze: transformation parameters
i: transformation on X axis

j: transformation on y axis
k: transformation on z axis

© 2019 ESI Group
22.1 Introduction
TRANSF = K x 100 + j x 10 + i
Four types of transformation are currently available ( 1, 2, 4, 8 or 9).
l A transformation is "single" if it modifies one coordinate.
Example:
TRANSF = 001 defines a type 1 transformation on the x axis
TRANSF = 080 defines a user-supplied transformation (type 8) on the y axis.
l A transformation is "double" if it modifies two coordinates.
Example:
TRANSF = 022 defines a type 2 transformation on the x and y axes.
l A transformation is "triple" if it modifies three coordinates.
Example:
TRANSF = 444 defines a type 4 transformation on the x, y and z axes.

© 2019 ESI Group
22.2 Infinite Unidirectional Transformation (type 1)
22.2 INFINITE UNIDIRECTIONAL TRANSFORMATION

(TYPE 1)
Single double or triple transformation.
TRANSF = kji with i or j or k = 1
x' = x - XCEN x : real point abscissa

X' = X - XCEN X : transformed point abscissa
This transformation can be applied to any coordinate (once, twice or three times), in
combination with other transformations.

© 2019 ESI Group
22.3 Ring or Sphere Transformation (Type 2)
22.3 RING OR SPHERE TRANSFORMATION (TYPE 2)

Double or triple transformation
TRANSF = kji with at least 2 from i, j, k = 2
x'i = x1 - XCEN or x2 - YCEN

X'i = X1 - XCEN or X2 - YCEN
If TRANSF = 022 XINT = YINT, XEXT = YEXT, XCOE = YCOE
This transformation can be applied to two (ring transformation) or three (sphere transformation)
coordinates.

© 2019 ESI Group
22.4 Square Ring or Square Sphere Transformation (Type 4)
22.4 SQUARE RING OR SQUARE SPHERE

TRANSFORMATION (TYPE 4)
Double or triple transformation.
TRANSF = kji with at least 2 from i, j, k = 4
(TRANSF = 044)
x' = x - XCEN y' = y - YCEN

X' = X – XCEN Y' = Y - YCEN
if TRANSF = 044
This transformation can be applied to two or three coordinates.

© 2019 ESI Group
22.5 User Transformation (Type 8 or 9)
22.5 USER TRANSFORMATION (TYPE 8 OR 9)

The user can program a specific space transformation, provided this is compatible with the
computer used, by writing sub-routine USTRF, for which the interface is described below:

© 2019 ESI Group
22.6 Post-Processing
22.6 POST-PROCESSING
The transformed geometry is modeled (meshing). Results can be post-processed in real space,
using a utility routine for geometry modification:
MODIFY
TRANSF
RETURN
The result is the real geometry.

© 2019 ESI Group
CHAPTER 23 DYNAMIC ELEMENTS OF ROTORS
23.1 Generalities - Modelization
CHAPTER 23 DYNAMIC ELEMENTS OF

ROTORS
23.1 GENERALITIES - MODELIZATION
Gyroscopic effects are characterized by the presence of unsymmetrical damped matrices.
The radial bearings (and axial thrust bearing) which link a rotor to the exterior environment are
often unsymmetrical stiffness and damped matrices. They can be modelized by unsymmetrical
1901 or 1902 elements. The table constancy which characterized these elements means that the
constant rotation velocity of a rotor is studied.
This rotor can be modelized by a beam supported by Oy axis in SPATIAL BEAM option
(rotation velocity from z to x). The rotor disks are supposed to be stiffness; they can be
modelized by classical punctual masses. The using of all elements in SPATIAL BEAM option
makes easier the study often complex of the vibratory interactions stator-rotor. The stator model
is compressed by Guyan’s reduction before being introduced as an element type 9 in the rotor
model.
The hypothesis of beam and stiffness disks modelizations may seem restrictive but, in physic,
for most industrial rotors, two elements are taken into account:
l the rotors slenderness ratio,
l frequency domain to be interested.

© 2019 ESI Group
23.2 Complex Eigenfrequencies
23.2 COMPLEX EIGENFREQUENCIES

The input data is described in the Chapter 11.2.4. Further information is given below:
SEARCH DATA i
DYNAMIC
MODES COMPLEX GYROSCOPIC ω0
VECTOR nv (THRESHOLD ε) (MODULUS ρ)
RETURN
SAVE STIFFNESS MASS DAMPINF i
SAVE DATA (RESULTS) MODES j
GYROSCOPIC ω0 a rotation velocity is taken into account ω0 (rd/s)

DAMPING file It includes the damping associated with data and gyroscopics
damping du to the rotation ω0.
Note:
l If complex eigenfrequency computations at different rotation velocities are continued, the DAMPING
file must be improved before each computation in order not to accumulate the gyroscopic dampings. The
DEASSIGN 33 command can be used.

© 2019 ESI Group
23.3 Harmonic Stationnary Response
23.3 HARMONIC STATIONNARY RESPONSE

The file containing the gyroscopic dampings can be used in the HARMONIC RESPONSE
(Chapter 11.5.) Only the input data features are presented hereafter:
SEARCH DATA STIFFNESS MASS DAMPING i

(SEARCH MODES j)
DYNAMIC
HARMONIC RESPONSE GYROSCOPIC (UNBALANCE) - -
(ASYNCHRONOUS s)
DAMPING GENERALIZED
FREQUENCY (INITIAL fi)
fp STEP df
METHOD SPARSE NON-SYMMETRICAL COMPLEX
(MODES n RATIO ε COMPLEX)
RETURN
SAVE DATA TRANSIENT m
GYROSCOPIC response to fixed direction harmonic excitations

UNBALANCE response to unbalance excitations. An unbalance requires a
definition of two loads at the same node.
Supposing that t = 0, the unbalance is situated in the yoz plan
with
: unbalanced mass
d : unbalanced excentrement
: rotation velocity
ASYNCHRONOUS response to a whirling asynchronous force
s
ω : excitation pulsation

Ω: rotation velocity
A whirling asynchronous force requires the definition of two loads
at the same node. The scanning frequency is the excitation
frequency.
Note:
l For the UNBALANCE and ASYNCHRONOUS commands, the COMPLEX COMBINATION procedure
permits the combination of 2 loads (Chapter. 23.5.).

© 2019 ESI Group
23.4 Time History Excitation Response
23.4 TIME HISTORY EXCITATION RESPONSE

The damping matrix can not be diagonalized. Only TRANSIENT NON LINEAR can be used
with the following command:
DAMPING GYROSCOPICω0
ω0: (constant) rotation velocity in rd/s.

An example is given Chapter 23.5.
Notes:
l Before executing a transient response, it would be carefully to do a complex eigenmodes computation to
make sure of the stable or instable character of the studied model.
l A transient study of an instable model is fine and the numerical damping associated with Newsmark’s
time related scheme can hide certain instabilities.
l Non-linearities type contact can be introduced in the computation through non linear elements type
1602.

© 2019 ESI Group
23.5 Example
23.5 EXAMPLE
The modelized rotor is studied in the Mr. Lalanne and Ferraris «Rotordynamics prediction in
Engineering»’s book (Editor: John Wiley-1990) by a Rayleigh-Ritz’s method with 2
generalized coordinates.
Rested - rested at it twice extremities, it has a disk and a bearing.
Notes concerning the bearing modelization.
l A bearing can be modelized by a 1901 element of which the stiffness matrix (damping) is (only d.o.f ux
and uz) :
l If the user want to obtain reactions on the bearing, an element 1902 must necessary be used ; if the node
1 is blocked the stiffness matrix (damping) is:
Notes concerning modelization for transient studies (at a constant rotation velocity)
l The data must have a single load
l Disk gyroscopic effects can be introduced through the damping matrix of 1901 elements which
expression is (only d.o.f. rx and rz):
Ω: rotation velocity (rd/s)

Ip: polar inertia of the disk.
; geometry - gyroscopic matrix - complex eigenfrequencies

;
definition
unsymmetrical damped rotor
option spatial beam
one-dimension
nodes
1 / 0. 0. 0.
31 / 0. 0.4 0.
elements
1 / 1 31 30
modify ; bearing creation

© 2019 ESI Group
23.5 Example
add
node
99 / 0. 0.26666667 0.
element
99 / 99 21 type 1902
materials properties
default e 2.*11 rho 7800.
elem 1 to 30 / ax 3.142*-4 iy iz 7.854*-9 rhomf 1.
default
elem 99 / table 636261 g 2
constraints
n 1 31 / ux uz
n 99 / ux uy uz rx ry rz
n 1 to 31 / ky 1.*12 hy 1.*12 ; stabilization UY RY ( traction - torsion )
loads
1 disk harmo.x force /
n 11 / fx 100.
2 disk harmo.z force /
n 11 / fz 100.
mass
n 11 / ax az 16.47 ix iz 9.427*-2 iy 0.1861 ; diskµ
damping
n 1 to 31 / ay 1.*5 iy 1.*5 ; stabilization UY RY ( traction - torsion )
tables ; bearing characteristics (stiffness - mass - damping )
61 / 1211 -2.*5 1213 -4.*4 1231 4.*4 1233 -5.*5
* 2211 2.*5 2213 4.*4 2231 -4.*4 2233 5.*5
62 /
63 / 1211 -1.*2 1233 -1.*2
* 2211 1.*2 2233 1.*2
verify
return
save data 1
; gyroscopic matrix and complex eigenfrequencies at 1000 r pm
dynamic ; stable system

modes complex gyroscopic 104.72 ; f1=46.70 Hz gamma1=0.055 %
vectors 4 modulus ; f2=50.94 Hz gamma2=1.145 %
return
save stiffness mass 1
save data modes damping 1000
deassign 33 ; no summation of gyroscopic matrices
; gyroscopic matrix and complex eigenfrequencies at 3000 rpm

© 2019 ESI Group
23.5 Example
search data 1
dynamic ; unstable system
modes complex gyroscopic 314.16 ; f1=42.98 Hz gamma1=-0.268 %
vectors 4 modulus ; f2=52.54 Hz gamma2= 1.244 %
return
save data modes damping 3000
end

© 2019 ESI Group
23.5 Example
;
; harmonic stationnary response
;
; 1 - fixed direction harmonic force - disk fx or fz = 100 N -

freq.=40/55 Hz
search data stiffness mass 1

search damping 3000
search modes 3000
dynamic
harmonic response reactions gyroscopic
damping generalized
frequency initial 40.
55. step 0.25
method sparse non-symmetrical complex
modes 7 ratio 0.015 complex
return
save data transient 3001
; 2 - disk unbalance F=100 N to 3000 rpm - freq.=40/55 Hz

search damping 3000
search modes 3000
dynamic
harmonic response reactions gyroscopic unbalance
damping generalized
75. step 0.5
return
combination complex
title
disk unbalance 100 N to 3000 rpm
phasis -1.5708 0.
amplitude 1 1 variable
table
1 / 4 1.01321*-5 2 ; parabol a=1./w**2
return

© 2019 ESI Group
23.5 Example
; 3 - whirling asynchronous disk force F=100 N s=0.5 -

freq.=5/75 Hz

search damping 3000
search modes 3000
dynamic
harmonic response reactions gyroscopic asynchronous 0.5

damping generalized
55. step 0.25
return
combination complex
title
asyn. disk force 100 N s=0.5
phasis -1.5708 0.
amplitude 1. 1.
return
end

© 2019 ESI Group
23.5 Example
;
; time history analysis - special data (load )
;
definition
stable damped unsymmetrical rotor - N=1000 rpm
option spatial beam
one-dimension
nodes
1 / 0. 0. 0.
31 / 0. 0.4 0.
elements
1 / 1 31 30
modify ; bearing creation
add
node
99 / 0. 0.26666667 0.
element
99 / 99 21 type 1902
material properties
default e 2.*11 rho 7800. omega 104.72
elem 1 to 30 / ax 3.142*-4 iy iz 7.854*-9 rhomf 1.
default
elem 99 / table 636261 g 2
constraints
n 1 31 / ux uz
n 99 / ux uy uz rx ry rz
n 1 to 31 / ky 1.*12 hy 1.*12 ; stabilization UY RY ( traction -
torsion )
loads
1 disk apparition unbalance /
n 11 / fx 100. ft 1
n 11 / fz 100. ft 2
mass
n 11 / ax az 16.47 ix iz 9.427*-2 iy 0.1861 ; disk
damping
n 1 to 31 / ay 1.*5 iy 1.*5 ; stabilization UY RY ( traction - torsion )
tables ; bearing characteristics (stiffness - mass - damping )
1 / 3 104.72 -1.5708 0. 10.
2 / 3 104.72 0. 0. 10.
61 / 1211 -2.*5 1213 -4.*4 1231 4.*4 1233 -5.*5
* 2211 2.*5 2213 4.*4 2231 -4.*4 2233 5.*5
62 /
63 / 1211 -1.*2 1233 -1.*2
* 2211 1.*2 2233 1.*2
verify
return

© 2019 ESI Group
Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Overview 1
1.1.1 Program Execution 1
1.1.2 SYSTUS 3
1.1.3 Data Structure 3
1.1.4 Preprocessing 4
1.1.5 File Management 4
1.1.6 Postprocessing 4
1.1.8 Substructuring 6
1.1.9 Command Compatibility with New Data 7
1.1.10 Environment Variables 10
1.2 Basic Concepts 18
1.2.1 Theoretical Basis 18
1.2.2 Discretization 18
1.2.3 Degrees of Freedom 18
1.2.4 Coordinate Systems 19
1.2.5 Boundary Conditions 19
1.2.6 Loads 20
1.2.7 Node and Element Numbering Systems 20
1.2.8 Units 20
1.3 Command Language 21
1.3.1 Overall Operation of SYSTUS 21
1.3.2 Language Characteristics 22
1.3.3 Language Structure 26
1.3.4 Automatic Number Generation 29
1.3.5 Node and Element Groups 30
1.3.6 Comments 31
1.3.7 Batch and Interactive Processing 32
1.4 Notation 35
1.4.1 Boxes 35
1.4.2 Labels and Numbers 36
1.4.3 Prefixes 36
1.4.4 Choice of Labels 37
1.4.5 Coordinate System 38
1.4.6 Node and Element Groups 40
1.5 Groups of Nodes or Elements 41
1.5.1 Creation of a Group 42
CONTENTS
1.5.2 Modification of a Group 48

1.5.3 Printing Information of a Group 49
1.5.4 Suppression of a Group 49
1.5.5 List of Existing Groups 49
1.5.6 Suppression of Temporary Groups 49
1.5.7 Packing of Existing Groups 49
1.5.8 Suppression of Groups 50
1.5.9 Updating Groups with Respect to the Creation Method 50
1.5.10 Suppression of Name Repetition 50
1.5.11 Utilization of Groups 51
1.5.12 Particular Groups: PARTS 51
CHAPTER 2 UTILITY PROCEDURES 53

2.1 Introduction 53
2.2 Operation Sequence Control 54
2.3 Alternative Input File 56
2.3.1 The Command ASSIGN 56
2.3.2 The Command DEASSIGN 57
2.3.3 The Command READ 57
2.3.4 The Command STOP 58
2.3.5 The Command REWIND 58
2.3.6 Comments 58
2.3.7 Examples 59
2.4 Accounting Information 62
2.4.1 The Command TIME 62
2.4.2 The Command END 62
2.5 Modification of Execution Mode 63
2.5.1 The Command MODE 63
2.5.2 The Command PAGING 63
2.6 Utility Routines 64
2.6.1 Executing Operating System Commands 64
2.6.2 The Command HISTORY 64
2.7 Stop the Execution (ONLY IN TRANSIENT COMPUTATION) 65
CHAPTER 3 FILE MANAGEMENT 67

3.1 Introduction 67
3.1.1 The Role of the Files 67
3.1.2 Glossary 68
3.1.3 Brief Description of Files 69
3.2 Permanent Files 71
3.2.1 Identification of a Permanent File 71
3.2.2 The Command SAVE 72
3.2.3 The Command SEARCH 75
3.2.4 The Command DELETE 77
3.2.5 File Labels 78
3.2.6 ASCII File Structure 79
3.2.7 The Command CARD 79

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
3.3 Communication With Other Programs 80

3.3.1 INPUT/OUTPUT Commands 80
3.3.2 IMPORT/EXPORT Commands 97
3.3.3 PAM-STAMP Interface 99
3.3.4 Convert SYSTUS Results into erf File with PAM-CSM Format 103
3.3.5 Convert SYSTUS/SYSWELD Results into erf File with CATGEN Format 104
CHAPTER 4 DEFINITION 107

4.1 Overview 107
4.1.2 Commands 108
4.1.3 Command DEFINITION RESTART and Label CONTINUE 110
4.2 Title of Problem 113
4.3 The Command OPTION 114
4.3.2 Types of Analysis 115
4.3.3 Thermoelastic Analysis 116
4.3.4 Periodic Structures Subjected to Fourier Decomposed Loads 117
4.4 The Command GEOMETRY 118
4.4.2 Definition of Nodes 119
4.4.3 Coordinate System 120
4.4.4 Translation and Rotation of Coordinate Systems 122
4.4.5 Format of Node Data 123
4.4.6 Definition of Elements 125
4.4.7 The Element Code 126
4.4.8 Format of Element Data 127
4.4.9 Generation of Sequences of Nodes and Elements 128
4.5 Material Properties 132
4.5.3 Global Definition of Material Properties 134
4.6 Media 136
4.6.3 Comments 137
4.7 Constraints 138
4.7.2 Rigid Constraints 139
4.7.3 Elastic Constraints at Nodes 143
4.7.4 Elastic Constraints over Elements 145
4.7.5 Comments 145
4.8 Loading 146
4.8.2 Definition of Load Case 147
4.8.3 Concentrated Loads 150
4.8.4 Distributed Loads 152

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
4.8.5 Loads Applied to Beams 154

4.8.6 Format of Load Data 156
4.8.7 Comments 157
4.8.8 Example 157
4.8.9 Loads Applied to Media 157
4.9 Releases 158
4.10 The Command RELATION 161
4.10.1 Decoupled Lagrange Multiplier Relations 162
4.10.2 Elimination Relations 164
4.10.3 Example: Structure Supported by another Structure 166
4.11 The Command MASS 169
4.11.2 Conventional Lumped Masses 170
4.11.3 Consistent Masses 170
4.11.4 Comments 171
4.11.5 Thermal Analysis in LINEAR TRANSIENT 171
4.12 The Command DAMPING 172
4.12.2 Conventional Lumped Damping 173
4.12.3 Consistent Damping 173
4.12.4 Comments 174
4.12.5 Thermal Analysis in NON-LINEAR TRANSIENT 174
4.13 The Command TEMPERATURE 175
4.14 The Command VELOCITY 177
4.15 The Command TABLE 178
4.15.2 Arrays 179
4.15.3 Functions Presented as Input Data 180
4.15.4 Functions on File 182
4.15.5 Generation of Functions using Simplified Fortran 185
4.15.6 Generation of Functions using Routines External to SYSTUS 188
4.15.7 Vectorial Functions of Several Variables 189
4.15.8 Text Type Tables 193
4.16 The Command LEVELSETS 195
4.17 The Command CRACKS 197
CHAPTER 5 AUTOMATIC MESH GENERATION 199

5.2 The Routine RECTANGLE 200
5.3 The Routine PARALLELEPIPED 202
5.4 The Routine ONE-DIMENSIONAL 204
5.5 The Routine SECTOR 207
5.5.2 Principles of Operation 207
5.5.4 Node and Element Numbering 210
5.5.5 Program Size Limits 210

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
5.5.6 Example 211

5.6 The Routine TWO-DIMENSIONAL 212
5.6.4 Generation of Interface Nodes 217
5.6.5 Generation of Macro-Elements 218
5.6.6 Generation of Singularities 220
5.6.8 Examples 222
5.6.9 Solids of Revolution or Translation 225
5.7 The Routine THREE-DIMENSIONAL 228
5.7.4 Example 232
5.8 User-Supplied Routines 234
5.8.2 Programming Considerations 235
5.8.3 Example 236
CHAPTER 6 MODIFICATION OF DATA 237

6.2 Routines Called by DEFINITION 238
6.2.1 The Routine MODIFY 238
6.2.2 The Routine ADD 241
6.2.3 The Routine RENUMBER 243
6.2.4 The Routine TRIANGLE 244
6.2.5 The Routine RBE 244
6.2.6 The routine VERIFY 249
6.2.7 The Routine RESTART 250
6.3 Routines Called Outside DEFINITION 251
6.3.1 The Routine MODIFY 251
6.3.2 The Routine RENUMBER 261
6.3.3 The Routine CORRECT 262
6.3.4 The Routine SURFACE 263
6.3.5 The Routine ASSEMBLE 264
6.3.6 The Routine LINEARISE 266
6.3.7 The Routine SECTION 270
6.3.8 The Routine ASSOCIATE 272
6.3.9 The Routine REMESH 297
6.3.10 The Routine RETRO 309
6.3.11 The Routine MULTI 310
6.4 Programmed Meshes 311
6.4.1 Principles 311
6.4.2 Types of Element Generated 312

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
6.4.3 Specification of Trajectories 314

6.4.5 Example 317
6.5 The Routine MEDIA 319
CHAPTER 7 VERIFICATION OF DATA 321

7.2 Verification Routines 322
7.2.1 The EXTRACT Command 322
7.2.2 The CHECK Command 324
7.2.3 The LIST Command 331
7.2.4 The VERIFY Command 332
7.2.5 Extraction of the Condensed Matrix of a Substructure 333
7.3 Equilibrium 334
7.3.1 Routine EQUILIBRIUM FORCE 334
7.3.2 Routine EQUILIBRIUM STIFFNESS 335
7.3.3 Routine EQUILIBRIUM MASS 336
7.3.4 Routine EQUILIBRIUM ENERGY 337
INDEX i
- vi - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

© 2019 ESI Group
Contents
CHAPTER 8 TYPES OF ANALYSIS 339

8.1.1 Features Common to Analysis of All Types of Structure 340
8.1.2 Residues 341
8.1.3 Interpretation of Computed Results 341
8.1.4 Printing of Results 342
8.2 Beams and Pin-Jointed Frames 346
8.2.2 Continuous Plane Frames 347
8.2.3 Grids 355
8.2.4 Continuous Three Dimensional Frames 363
8.2.5 Plane Pin-Jointed Frames 378
8.2.6 Three Dimensional Pin-Jointed Frames 383
8.3 Plates and Shells 389
8.3.1 Plates 389
8.3.2 Axisymmetric Shells 395
8.3.3 General Shells 402
8.4 Continuous Media 434
8.4.2 Two Dimensional Analysis 435
8.4.3 Three Dimensional Analysis 451
8.5 Harmonic Loading 463
8.5.1 Harmonic Loading of Shells 465
8.5.2 Harmonic; Loading of Three Dimensional Solids 477
8.6 Thermal and Electromagnetic Analysis 487
8.6.1 Thermal Analysis 487
8.6.2 Electromagnetic Analyses 487
8.6.3 Coupled Analyses 488
8.7 Fluid-Structure Interaction 489
8.7.2 Harmonic Loading of Axisymmetric Shells 490
8.7.3 General Shells 495
8.7.4 Coaxial Cylinders 500
8.8 Special Elements 505
8.8.1 Element Type 9 (X9XX) 505
8.8.2 Element Defined by User Supplied Subroutine (type 8) 524
8.8.3 Special Constraint Element (type 6) 527
8.9 Shells Specially Designed for Non-Linear Analysis 533
CONTENTS
8.9.1 SHE8 Spatial Shell Option 533

8.9.2 SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 548
8.9.3 SHET Thermal Shell Option 555
8.10 Mixing Option (MULTI Command) 559
8.10.2 Two Dimensional Structures 560
8.10.3 Three Dimensional Structures 562
8.10.4 Routine of Transition Element Creation 565
8.10.5 Limitation on the Use of Post Processing 566
8.10.6 Example 1: Mixing Options for 2D/Beam Elements 567
8.10.7 Example 2: 3D/Space Shell Mixed Problem 569
8.11 Different Types of Media 576
8.11.1 General 576
8.11.2 Regulation-Adjustment Medium 578
8.11.3 Contacts 582
8.11.4 Trajectory Loading Medium 608
INDEX i

© 2019 ESI Group
Contents
CHAPTER 9 LINEAR STATIC SOLUTION 613

9.1 Presentation-General Syntax 613
9.2 Static Solution 615
9.2.1 General Operation 615
9.2.2 Choice of Method of Solution 616
9.2.3 Analyze Check- Rerun 617
9.3 Creation of Elementary Matrices 619
9.3.1 Standard Utilization 619
9.3.2 Utilization of Elimination Methods 621
9.4 Harmonic Loading 622
9.5 Thermoelastic Analysis 623
9.5.1 Basis 623
9.5.2 Temperature File 624
9.5.3 Examples 626
9.6 Contacts for Linear Static Analysis 630
9.6.1 Object 630
9.6.2 Files 631
9.6.3 Data Description 632
9.6.4 Example 633
CHAPTER 10 SUBSTRUCTURING 635

10.1.1 Terminology 635
10.1.2 Example 636
10.2 Method of Analysis 638
10.3 File Management 640
10.3.1 Description of Files 640
10.3.2 Calculation Steps 642
10.4 Optimization of an Analysis 644
10.4.1 Re-Use of Substructures 644
10.4.2 Change of Axes 646
10.4.3 Re-Use of Files 647
10.4.4 Interfacing of Different Types of Structure 648
10.5 Input Data 650
10.5.1 Zero Level Substructure (superelement) 650
10.5.2 Level n Substructure 653
10.5.3 The Command CALCULATE 656
10.5.4 Automatic Link Generator (A.L.G.) 658
10.6 Procedures associated with Substructure 662
CONTENTS
10.7 Conclusions 663
CHAPTER 11 DYNAMIC 665

11.2 Eigenmodes and Eigenfrequencies - Direct Methods 668
11.2.1 Real Eigenmodes and Eigenfrequencies 668
11.2.2 Real Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes with Fluid-Structure Interaction 697
11.2.3 Complex Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes (Symmetrical Matrices) 704
11.2.4 Complex Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes (Non-Symmetrical Matrices) 709
11.3 Real Eigenmodes and Eigenfrequencies - Modal Synthesis 713
11.3.1 General 713
11.3.2 Description of Methods 714
11.3.3 Description of a Physical Super-Element 719
11.3.4 Description of Computation Steps 720
11.3.5 File Management 722
11.3.7 Example: Uniform Clamped-Free Beam 736
11.3.8 Experimental Super-Elements 741
11.3.9 Dynamic Automatic Link Generator (D.A.L.G.) 749
11.4 Dynamic Response - Modal Method 751
11.4.1 General 751
11.4.2 Modal Forces - Representativeness of the Modal Base 756
11.4.3 Transient Response (Modal Analysis) 767
11.4.4 Harmonic Response 783
11.4.5 Stochastic Dynamics 790
11.4.6 Seismic Response - Spectral Method 800
11.4.7 Consistant Modal Matrices Method 818
11.5 Harmonic Loads - Direct Method 823
11.5.1 General 823
11.5.3 Results 827
11.6 Sensitivity Analysis 829
11.6.1 General 829
11.6.2 Analytical Re-Analysis in the Modal Base 830
11.6.3 Complete Re-Analysis in the Modal Base 833
11.7 Utility Modules 841
11.7.1 Equivalent Modal Damping 841
11.7.2 Generation of Spectral Response 844
11.7.3 Computation of Effective Masses and Effective Inertia 852
11.7.4 Transient Dynamic 854
CHAPTER 12 TRANSIENT 861

12.1 Overview 861
12.1.2 Time-Related Scheme 862
12.1.3 Special Features 863
12.1.4 Commands 864

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
12.2 Linear Thermal Analysis 865

12.2.2 Forced Convection 866
12.2.3 Use of Routine 867
12.2.4 Example of a Quadratic Mesh Treatment 873
12.3 Linear Elasticity 875
12.3.1 General Equation 875
12.3.2 General 876
12.3.3 Use of Routine 877
12.3.4 Relations 883
12.3.5 Calculation of Forces 885
12.4 Non-Linear Dynamic Analysis 888
12.4.2 Detail of Time-Related Scheme 891
12.4.3 Utilization of the Routine 892
12.4.4 Combination between Non-Linearities and Algorithms 913
12.4.5 Relations 915
12.4.6 HISTORY and TRANSIENT Files 920
12.5 Non-Linear Static Analysis 923
12.5.1 General Equation 923
12.5.2 Implicit Algorithm 924
12.5.3 Utilization 924
12.5.4 Substructuring 925
12.6 Transient Shell 929
12.6.1 Mechanical 929
12.6.2 Thermal 941
12.7 Utility Routines 944
12.7.2 Transient Thermo-Mechanical Analysis: the TEMPERATURE Command 944
12.7.3 Manipulation of the TRANSIENT File - The SELECT Command 949
12.8 Transfer of Physical Quantities from Mesh to Mesh 952
12.9 Element Activation/Deactivation 962
12.9.2 Activation/Deactivation Function 962
12.9.3 Input Data: Element Properties 963
12.9.4 Input Data: Definition of Initial State 964
12.9.5 Data Storage 964
12.9.6 Practical Tips 964
12.9.7 Examples 965
INDEX i

© 2019 ESI Group
Contents
CHAPTER 13 POST PROCESSING 971

13.2 Average Node Stress and Strain 977
13.2.3 Files 979
13.2.6 Example 982
13.2.7 Location of Gaussian Points for Calculation of Stress 983
13.2.8 Average for Thick Shells 988
13.2.9 Average Transient 990
13.3 Combination of Results 993
13.3.2 Linear Combinations 994
13.3.3 Quadratic and Absolute Combination 996
13.3.4 Storage on File of Combinations 997
13.3.5 Combination of Fourier Series Terms (harmonics) 999
13.3.6 Complex Combination 1001
13.4 Merging of Results 1003
13.4.2 The Command MERGE 1004
13.4.3 Merging of Posts 1006
13.4.4 Merging of Cards 1007
13.4.5 Merging of Transient Files 1008
13.5 Cross Sections 1009
13.5.2 Files 1009
13.5.5 Input data 1011
13.5.6 Example 1017
13.6 Postprocessing Module 1018
13.6.2 Files 1019
13.6.5 Example 1029
CONTENTS
13.7 Printing of Results 1033

13.7.1 The PRINT Command 1033
13.7.2 The Command PRINT TRANSIENT or MODE 1035
13.7.3 Command PRINT CONSTRAINTS 1037
13.8 The Command REARRANGE 1039
13.9 The Command FORCE 1040
13.10 The Command STRESS 1042
13.10.1 General Case 1043
13.10.2 Stresses in Laminated Shells 1046
13.10.3 Stresses in Beams using Section Database 1047
13.11 The command SPLIT 1054
13.12 The Command MINMAX 1056
13.13 The Command SHELL 1057
13.14 Three-Dimensional 1061
13.15 Local 1065
13.15.2 Files 1065
13.15.3 Input Data 1066
13.15.4 Example 1071
13.16 A Posteriori Error Estimator 1076
13.16.1 General 1076
13.16.2 Application Fields 1077
13.16.3 Input Data 1077
13.16.4 Error Analysis 1077
CHAPTER 14 POSTPROCESSING AND GRAPHIC OUTPUT 1079

14.2 Open - Close 1081
14.3 Post-Processing File Result Conversion 1082
14.3.1 CONVERT Procedure 1082
14.3.2 Post-Processing File Conversion - Printout 1084
14.3.3 Dataset 1085
14.4 Averaging Post-Processing 1098
14.5 Visualization of Results 1101
14.6 The Command CURVE POSTPROCESSING 1112
14.6.3 Example 1115
14.7 The Command CURVE TRANSIENT 1116
14.8 The Command CURVE FUNCTION 1121
14.9 The Command CURVE SATURATION 1122
14.10 The Command CURVE TABULATION 1123
14.11 The Command CURVE AVERAGE 1124
14.12 Specific Post-Processing for Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis 1127

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 15 TOPOLOGY OF ELEMENTS 1131
CHAPTER 16 SYSTEMS OF AXES 1133

16.1 Global Axes (X, Y, Z) 1133
16.2 Local Axes (x, y, z) 1134
16.2.1 One-Dimensional Elements 1134
16.2.2 Two-Dimensional Elements 1136
16.2.3 Three-Dimensional Elements 1143
CHAPTER 17 MATERIAL BEHAVIOR LAWS 1145

17.1 Notations 1145
17.2 Elasticity 1147
17.2.1 General 1147
17.2.2 Isotropic Linear Elasticity 1149
17.2.3 Anisotropic Linear Elasticity 1151
17.2.4 Non-Linear Elasticity 1154
17.3 Elastoplasticity 1159
17.3.1 Theory 1160
17.3.2 User-Programmed Criterion 1168
17.3.3 Description of Models and Input Data 1172
17.4 Viscoplasticity 1209
17.4.2 Non-Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models 1210
17.4.3 Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models (Model = 21) 1213
17.4.4 Chaboche Model 1216
17.4.5 Thermo-Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior Models (Model = 51) 1218
17.4.6 Rigid Viscoplastic Model (Model = 61) 1219
17.4.7 Elastoviscoplastic Model Coupled with Creep Damage (Model 71) 1221
17.4.8 Creep Models Applicable to Tube Elements 1223
17.5 Viscoelasticity 1226
17.5.2 Generalized MAXWELL Model (Linear Viscoelasticity) (Model = 11) 1227
17.5.3 Thermo-Viscoelastic Model (Model = 12) 1229
17.5.4 Non-Linear Viscoelasticity Model (Model = 13) 1234
17.6 Hyperelasticity 1236
17.6.1 Theory 1236
17.7 User-Programmed Behavior Law 1240
17.7.1 Principle 1240
17.7.2 Programming and Interpretation of Arguments 1241
17.8 Large Displacements and Large Strains 1247
17.8.1 Spatial Beam and Shell Options 1247
17.8.2 Two-Dimensional and Three-Dimensional Options 1249
17.9 Transient File Force Contents 1251

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
17.9.2 General Structure of the Force File 1252

17.9.3 Spatial SHELL - Spatial BEAM Option 1254
17.9.4 Two-Dimensional Option 1262
17.9.5 Three-Dimensional Option 1272
17.9.6 COQ8 Three-Dimensional Shell Option 1282
17.9.7 COQD Axisymmetrical Harmonic Shell Option 1283
17.9.8 COQT Thermal Shell Option 1284
17.10 References 1285
CHAPTER 18 COMMON BLOCKS 1289

18.1 Blank Common 1289
18.2 Common COMAIL 1293
18.3 Common COMMAT and COMMIL 1294
18.4 Common COMTRA 1304
CHAPTER 19 RIK'S METHOD 1305

19.1 General 1305
19.2 Constant Arc-Length Incrementation 1306
19.3 Variable Arc-Length Incrementation: Arc-Length Updated at Each Increment 1309
19.4 Variable Arc-Length Incrementation associated with a Buckling Calculation 1310
19.5 Note 1311
CHAPTER 20 SECTION MANAGEMENT DATABASE 1313

20.1 Simple Database Section 1314
20.2 Standard Database Section 1315
CHAPTER 21 LINEAR EQUATION SOLVERS 1319

21.2 Characteristics 1321
21.2.1 Standard Solvers 1321
21.2.2 External Solvers 1323
21.2.3 Summary Table of Solvers Properties 1323
21.3 Input Data 1324
21.3.1 Type 1324
21.3.2 Properties 1324
21.3.3 Parameters 1325
21.3.4 Extract Labels for the Treatment 1326
21.4 Notes 1327
CHAPTER 22 SPACE TRANSFORMATIONS 1329

22.2 Infinite Unidirectional Transformation (type 1) 1331
22.3 Ring or Sphere Transformation (Type 2) 1332
22.4 Square Ring or Square Sphere Transformation (Type 4) 1333
22.5 User Transformation (Type 8 or 9) 1334
22.6 Post-Processing 1335

© 2019 ESI Group
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 23 DYNAMIC ELEMENTS OF ROTORS 1337

23.1 Generalities - Modelization 1337
23.2 Complex Eigenfrequencies 1338
23.3 Harmonic Stationnary Response 1339
23.4 Time History Excitation Response 1340
23.5 Example 1341
INDEX i

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
EXPORT 97
INDEX EXTRACT
FILE
322, 333
300
FRACTURE 300
FUNCTION 299
(VOL.1) GEOMETRY 118
GOTO 54
GROUP 42
A HISTORY 64
HYDROSTATIC 299
ASCII 72 IMPORT 97
Automatic Number Generation 29 INCREMENTATION 301
INPUT 83
INPUT/OUTPUT 80
B LEVEL 299
LEVELSETS 195
Batch Mode 32 LINEARISE 266
Boundary Conditions 19 LIST 331
LOADS 146
MASS 169
C MASTER 293
MATERIAL PROPERTIES 132
Command MEDIA 136, 319
$FORMAT 123 MISES 299
ADD 241 MODE 63
ASEMBLE 264 MODIFY 251
ASSIGN 56 MULTI 310
ASSOCIATE 273, 280, 290-292, 295 NODES 214
AXES 122, 238 OFFSET 259
CHECK 324 ONE-DIMENSIONAL 204
CONSTRAINTS 138 OPTION 114, 301
CONTACTOR 283, 290 OUTPUT 80
COORDINATES 120, 238 PAGING 63
COORDINATES CARTESIAN 120 PARALLELEPIPED 202
COORDINATES CYLINDRICAL 120 POINTS 54
COORDINATES POLAR 120 RBE 293
COORDINATES SPHERICAL 121 READ 57
CORRECT 239, 262 RECTANGLE 200
Crack 300 RELATION 161
CRACK 260 RELATION ELIMINATION 164
CRACKS 197 RELEASE 158
CRITERION 274, 281, 290-291, 295 REMESH 298
DAMPING 172 RENUMBER 243, 261
DEASSIGN 57 RESTART 244, 250
DEFAULT 134 RETRO 309
DEFINITION 108, 238 RETURN 108
DEFINITION RESTART 110 REWIND 58
DELETE 77 SAVE 72
EDGE 215 SEARCH 75
ELEMENTS 125, 215 SECTION 270
END 62 SECTOR 207
EQUILIBRIUM ENERGY 337 SINGULARITY 215
EQUILIBRIUM FORCE 334 SLAVE 293
EQUILIBRIUM MASS 336 SLIDING 281, 290
EQUILIBRIUM STIFFNESS 335 SOURCE 274, 290-291
ERROR 54 STOP 58
SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL -i-

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
SUPPRESS 216 Stiffnesses 70

SURA 296 Transient 69
SURB 296 TRANSIENT 94
SURFACE 263 File Management 4
TABLE 178
TARGET 274, 283, 290, 292
TEMPERATURE 175, 299
G
THERMAL 295
TIME 62 Generation of Sequences of Nodes and
TRIANGLE 244 Elements 128
VELOCITY 177
VERIFY 249, 332 I
Concentrated Loads 150
Consistent Masses 170 Interactive Mode 32
Coordinate System 38, 120 Interface Nodes 217
Coordinate Systems 19
Creation of a Group 42 L
D Label
ALPHA 208, 225
Definition of Nodes 119 AXES 208
CARTESIAN 120
Degrees of Freedom 18
CLOSED 225
Discretization 18 COORD 43
Distributed Loads 152 CYLINDRICAL 120
DAMPING 337
E ELEMENT 43
FORCE 274
Elastic Constraints at Nodes 143 GENERATE 204, 208
GROUP 329
Elastic Constraints over Elements 145 LAST 300
LENGHT 208
F LENGTH 225
LOWER 43
File MEDIUM 261
Direct Access 68, 183 MIDDLE 221
Displacements-Reactions-Forces-Nodal NODE 43
Stresses-Strains 69 POLAR 120
Eigenvectors 70 PRECISION 44
History 70 PROGRESSION 208
Input Data 69 RELATIVE 154
INTERFACE 84 SPHERICAL 120
Labels 78 STEP 225
Local 68 UNTIL 155
Mass-Buckling-Damping 70 UPPER 43
Matrix 70 Labels and Numbers 36
Media 69 Loads 20
Modal 70 Loads Applied to Beams 154
Permanent 68, 71
Postprocessing 70 Loads Applied to Media 157
Random Access 68
RESULT 94 M
Sequential 68, 182
Sequential Stress File 69 Macro Element 218

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
Modify Three-Dimensional 228

Coincident nodes 253 TIED Elements 291
Constraints 252 Types of Analysis 115
Coordinates 252
Isolated nodes 254
Offset 259 U
Orientation 254
Vectors 252 Units 20
N V
Node and Element Numbering Systems 20 Vectorial Functions of Several Variables 189
O
Operating System Commands 64
P
PAMSYS 101
Periodic Structures Subjected to Fourier
Decomposed Loads 117
Postprocessing 4
Prefixes 36
Preprocessing 4
Programmed Meshes
Specification of Trajectories 314
Types of Element Generated 312
R
RBE Elements 292
REFERENTIEL
DEGRES 38
GRADES 38
RADIANS 38
TANGENTE 38
S
Simplified Fortran 185
Singularities 220
Slide Plane 277
Substructuring 6
T
Thermal Analysis in Linear Transient 171
Thermal Analysis in Non-Linear Transient 174
Thermoelastic Analysis 116

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
SHELL 565
INDEX SOLID
SOLVE HARMONIC
565
464
Computed Results
(VOL.2) Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option
Beams Option
401
377
Grids Option 361
Plane Truss Option 382
A Plate Option 394
SHED axisymmetric harmonic shell option 553
Applied Loads Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 493
Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option 399 Shell Fluid Option 498
Beams Option 373 Shell Harmonic Option 475
Grids Option 359 Shell Option 431
Plane Beam Option 351 Shell SHE8 Option 545
Plane Truss Option 380 SHET Thermal Shell Option 558
Plate Option 393 Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 485
SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 551 Three Dimensional Option 462
Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 492 Truss Option 388
Shell Fluid Option 498 Two Dimensional Option 450
Shell Harmonic Option 473 Constraints
Shell Option 422 Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option 398
Shell SHE8 Option 541 Beams Option 371
SHET Thermal Shell Option 557 Grids Option 358
Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 483 Plane Beam Option 350
Three Dimensional Option 459 Plane Truss Option 379
Truss Option 386 Plate Option 392
Two Dimensional Option 447 SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 550
Axisymmetric of Translation Shell Option Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 492
Applied Loads 399 Shell Fluid Option 497
Computed Results 401 Shell Harmonic Option 472
Constraints 398 Shell Option 421
Material Properties 396 Shell SHE8 Option 538
SHET Thermal Shell Option 557
B Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 482
Three Dimensional Option 458
Truss Option 384
Beam/Solid Transition Element 510 Two Dimensional Option 446
Beams Option 363 Contacts 582
Applied Loads 373
Computed Results 377 Continuous Three Dimensional Frames 363
Constraints 350, 371 Coupled Analyses 488
Geometry of Section 366 Criterion
List of Elements 364 Hill 417
Material Properties 365 Tsai 418
C E
Coaxial Cylinders 500 Eccentricity
Command Shell option 411
BEAM 565 Electromagnetic Analyses 487
COMPATIBILITY 565
DEFINITION MEDIUM 609
MATERIAL PROPERTIES 515
MIXING 565

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
F SC3D 601
SL2D 592, 601
SPHERE 597
Family TORUS 597
2003-2004 405
2006-2008 407
Material Properties
2203-2204 405 Axisymmetric or Translation Shell Option 396
2403-2404 405, 407 Beams Option 365
Grids Option 356
Fluid-Structure Interaction 489 Plane Beam Option 348
Plane Truss Option 379
G Plate Option 391
SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 549
Generalized Contact 597 Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 491
Grids Option 355 Shell Fluid Option 497
Applied Loads 359 Shell Harmonic Option 467
Computed Results 361 Shell Option 410
Constraints 358 Shell SHE8 Option 535
Material Properties 356 SHET Thermal Shell Option 556
Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 479
I Truss Option 384
Two Dimensional Option 440
Interpretation of Computed Results 341 Mixing Option 559
L O
Label Option
FAST 584 Plane Beam 347
MULTI 560 Plane Truss 378
PENALTY 584 Plate 389
List of Elements SHE8 Spatial Shell 533
Beams Option 364 SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell 548
Plane Truss Option 379 Shell 402
SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell Option 549 Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic 490
Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option 491 Shell Fluid 495
Shell Fluid Option 496 Shell Harmonic 465
Shell Option Option 403 SHET Thermal Shell Option 555
Shell SHE8 Option 535 Three Dimensional 451
SHET Thermal Shell Option 556 Three Dimensional Harmonic 477
Three Dimensional Harmonic Option 479 Two Dimensional 435
Truss Option 384
Two Dimensional Option 438
P
Plane Beam Option
M Applied Loads 351
Constraints 350
Macro Elements Material Properties 348
CONE 597 Plane Truss Option
CYLINDER 597 Applied Loads 380
GAP 583 Computed Results 382
INTERFACE 587 Constraints 379
NIT3D 605 List of Elements 379
PLANE 589, 597 Material Properties 379
RECTANGLE 597

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
Plate Option Thermo-Elastic Properties of Anisotropic

Applied Loads 393 Shell Elements 412
Computed Results 394 Thermo-Elastic Properties of Isotropic Shell
Constraints 392 Elements 412
Material Properties 391 Shell SHE8 Option
Printing of Results 342 Applied Loads 541
Default Element Type Codes 345 Computed Results 545
Displacements 342 Constraints 538
Forces 343 Material Properties 535
Reactions 342 Shell/Solid Transition Element 509
Special Case of Beams 343 Shells specially Designed for Non-Linear
Type pf Structure (Number) 345
Analysis 533
SHET Thermal Shell Option
R Applied Loads 557
Computed Results 558
Regulation-Adjustment Medium 578 Constraints 557
Residues 341 List of Elements 556
Material Properties 556
S Special Constraint Element 527
Special Contact Element 513
Sandwich Materials 420 Special Elements 505
SHED Axisymmetric Harmonic Shell
Option T
Applied Loads 551
Computed Results 553 Tabulated Element 506
Constraints 550 Thermal Analysis 487
Three Dimensional Harmonic Option
Shell Axisymmetric Fluid Harmonic Option Applied Loads 483
Applied Loads 492 Computed Results 485
Computed Results 493 Constraints 482
Constraints 492 List of Elements 479
List of Elements 491 Material Properties 479
Three Dimensional Option
Shell Fluid Option Applied Loads 459
Applied Loads 498 Computed Results 462
Computed Results 498 Constraints 458
Constraints 497 List of Elements 454
List of Elements 496 Material Properties 454
Shell Harmonic Option Reduced Integration Rule for an Element 457
Applied Loads 473 Trajectory Loading Medium 608
Computed results 475
Constraints 472
Transition Element 511
Material Properties 467 Truss Option 383
Applied Loads 386
Shell Option
Applied Loads 422
Constraints 384
List of Elements 384
Constraints 421
Definition of Pressure 425
Excentricity 411 Two Dimensional Option
Geometrical Properties 410 170X Elements 439
List of Elements 403 Applied Loads 447
Material Properties 410 Computed Results 450
Constraints 446

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
List of Elements 438

Overall Axisymmetric Behavior 437
Overall Plane Strain Behavior 437
Reduced Integration Rule for an Element 445

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
INITIAL
INDEX CONDITION
S 776, 869, 879, 903, 937, 941
INITIAL CONDITIONS RESTART 905
(VOL.3) INTEGRATION 793
LEVEL CROSSING 795
LIMITS 677
A LINK 659, 749
LOAD 632, 735, 759
MAXIMA 795
Automatic Link Generator 658
METHOD 845, 900
MODAL ANALYSIS 770
C MODE 674, 677, 680, 682-683, 687,
698, 705, 786, 805, 826
Combination between Non-Linearities and MODIFICATION 830
Algorithms 913 MODIFY 727
Command MOMENT 793
ACCELEROGRAM 845 PARTICIPATION 758, 761
ACCELEROGRAM TRANSIENT 846 PARTICIPATION MULTI 762
ALGORITHM 775, 894, 930 PRECISION 898
ALGORITME IMPLICIT 868 PRINT 779, 942
ASSEMBLE DYNAMIC 731, 734 PRINT COMPLETE 938
AXES 831 PRINT VALUES 676
BANDWITH 795 PROJECT 953
BEHAVIOUR 900, 929, 941 PSD 791
CALCULATE 632, 656, 792-794 PSEUDO MODAL 833
CALCULATE DYNAMIC 728 REGIME 941
CARD 780, 792-793, 950 RELATION 883
CHECK 659 RELEASE 659
CIRCULAR FREQUENCY 786, 826 RESIDUAL TERMS 762
COMBINATION 778 RESPONSE 825, 831
COMBINE 805 RESULTS 779
COMPLEX MODES 710 RUNEND 911
COMPONENTS 726 SELECT 676, 771, 779, 785, 834, 842, 949
CONNECTION 658, 727, 749 SENSITIVITY 830
CONTACT 632 SEQUENCE 691
DAMPING754, 772, 785, 806, 825, 842, 845, 910 SIL 910
DEFECT TRANSIENT 937 SOLVE 613, 616, 668, 877
DIMENSION 941 SOLVE BUCKLING 695
DIMENSION MEMORY 929 SOLVE FORCE TRANSIENT 885
DIRECTION 806, 814 SOLVE FORCES MODAL 689, 707
DISPLACEMENT 813 SOLVE HARMONIC 622
DURATION 806 SPECTRAL ANALYSIS 805
EFFECTIVE MASS 852 SPECTRAL ANALYSIS MULTIPLE 812
ELEMENT 710, 834 SPECTRUM 806, 813
FATIGUE 795 STATIC 812, 933
FREQUENCY 786, 826 STIFFNESS 727
FREQUENCY INITIAL 845 STOCHASTIC 794
FRONT 699 STOP 772
FUNCTION 771, 779, 785, 791, 878, 903 STRAIN GENERALISED 902
GAP 632 SUBSTRUCTURE 653
GENERATION 845 SUBSTRUCTURE DYNAMIC 725-726
HARMONIC RESPONSE MODAL 785 SUMMATION 695
SUPER ELEMENT 650
SUPERELEMENT DYNAMIC 725

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
SUPPRESS 676
TABLE 711, 772, 779, 786, 792, 807, 834, 878, G
903
TEMPERATURE 624, 944 Generation of Spectral Response 844
TEMPERATURE TRANSIENT 944
TEMPERATURE TRANSIENT SHELL 929, 947 H
TIME 777, 941
TITLE 771, 779 Harmonic Loads - Direct Method 823
TRANSFER 786
TRANSIENT 864, 877-878
Harmonic Response 783
TRANSIENT NON LINEAR 892, 921
UNIDIRECTIONAL 773 L
VECTOR 680, 687, 699, 706, 711, 835
Complex Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes Label
(Non-Symmetrical Matrices 709 ABSOLUTE 814, 898
ACCELERATION 692
Complex Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes ALL 710
(Symmetrical Matrices) 704 AMPLITUDE 855
Computation of Effective Masses and ARCHIVATE 892
Effective Inertia 852 BEAMS 692
Coupled Friction 917 BERGAN 895
BFGS 894
Cylindrical Stop 773 BINARY 921
BLOCK 687, 730
D BUCKLING 674
CARD 624, 855, 869, 879, 904, 956
Decoupled Friction 917 CARDS 885
Detail of Time-Related Scheme 891 CIRCULAR FREQUENCY 677, 680, 687
COMPACT 870, 880, 906
DYNAMIC 687, 698, 793-794, 812, 825
COMPLEX 885
Dynamic Responses 665 CONDENSATION 698
CONSTRAINT REMOVE 905
E CONTACT 896
DATA 954
Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes 665 DEFORMED CARD 953
Enumeration of Eigenvalues (Sturm DESACTIVATE 910
DIAGONAL 675, 682, 687
Sequences) 694 DIRECTION 761
Equivalent Modal Damping 841 DISPLA 770
DISPLACEMENT 899
F DT tshift 944
DTLAST 906
File DURATION dt 905
FMDAT.DAT 895 EDIT 791
HISTORY 920 ENERGY 899
MASD 723 EQUIVALENT STRESSES 692
RESU 722 EULER 901
RIGD 723 EXTRACT 729, 885, 893, 905
SPECnf.DAT 848 FACTOR 680
TRANSIENT 920 FILE 732
VECD 723 FILTER 885
FLUID 771, 779
FLUID STRUCTURE 698
FORCE 706, 759, 770, 898
FORCES 675
FREQUENCY 677, 680, 684, 687

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
GENERATE 624 RIGID 759, 770

GIVENS 674 RIKS 895, 904
GRAD 894 SAVE 895
GROUP 895 SCALING 867, 877, 892
GUYAN 683 SEARCH 885, 895
GYROSCOPIC 710 SELECT 954
HYPERELASTIC 901 SEMI-QUADRATIC 814
INITIAL 870, 906 SHELL 692
INVERSE POWER 674 SHELL THERMAL 941
ITERATION 680, 687, 706 SHIFT 674, 683, 687, 730
ITERATIONS 730, 894 SIZE 675, 682
ITERATIVE 680 SKIP 870, 880, 906
ITMAXIMAL 894 STATIC 892
JAUMAN 902 STEP 895
JOURNAL 892 STRESS 898, 953
LARDIS 899 STURM 685, 688
LARGE 899 SUPER ELEMENT 926
LAST 869, 879, 904, 956 SUSPACE 674
LINEAR 895 TOLERANCE 899
LINEARIZE 867 TOTLAGRANGE 901
LINK 732 UNIT 898
LOG 791 UPDLAGRANGE 901-902
LOWER 677 UPPER 677
LSEARCH 896 VARIABLE 855
MAXF 899 VECTOR 729
MEITERATION 895 VERIFY 892
METHOD 955 VISCOELASTIC 901
MODULUS 711 WATCH 910
MULTI 759, 770 Linear Elasticity 875
NOCHECK 729 Linear Thermal Analysis 865
NON LINEAR 892
NORM 675, 699, 899
OPTIMIZE 894 M
OTHER 730
PARAMETER EPSILON 956 Material Stop 774
PARAMETER EXTERIOR 955 Method
PARAMETER INTERIOR 956 GIVENS 676
PENALTY 896 INVERSE POWER 677
PERTURBATION 894 ITERATIVE SUBSPACE 679
PHASE 855 Lanczos subspace 682
PLASTIC 901 Lanczos SUBSPACE Method with BLOCK
PRECISION 680, 688, 730 Option 686
PREDICTION 895 Lanczos SUBSPACE Method with GUYAN
PRINT 675, 699, 729, 732 Option 683
PSD 791 Modal Forces - Representativeness of the
PULSATION 684
RATIO 710 Modal Base 756
REAL 885 Modal Method 751
REBUILT 892 Modal Synthesis 713
REDUCTION 684 Modification of the Mass Matrix 671
REFORM 894 Modification of the Stiffness Matrix 671
RELAXATION 894
REMESH 954
Mono-Spectral analysis 803
RESIDUAL 730 Multi-Spectral Analysis 811
RESIDUE 886
RESTART 869-870, 879-880, 904, 906

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
N Z
Non-linear Dynamic Analysis 888 Zero Level Substructure 650
Non-Linear Static Analysis 923
O
Option
Axisymmetrical Harmonic 802
Fluid-Structure 802
P
Participation Factors 756
Plane Frictional Stop 774
R
Real Eigenfrequencies and Eigenmodes with
Fluid-Structure Interaction 697
Response Power Spectral Density 790
S
Seismic Response - Spectral Method 800
Sensitivity Analysis 666, 829
Simultaneous Modification of Stiffness and
Mass Matrices 671
Stochastic Dynamics 790
Substructure Modes 714
Substructuring 925
T
Thermoelastic Analysis 623
Transfer Functions 783
Transient Dynamic 854
Transient Response (Modal Analysis) 767
Transient Shell 929
U
Unidirectional Frictional Stop 773
Unidirectional Stop 772
Utility Modules 666

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
MEDIUM 1117
INDEX MERGE
METHOD
1004
1324
MINMAX 1056
(VOL.4) MODE
NODES
1035
1013, 1025, 1117
NUMBER 1084
A OPEN 1081
POINTS 1013
POSTPROCESSING 1021
Anisotropic Linear Elasticity 1151 PRINT 1033, 1035
Average for Thick Shells 988 PRINT CONSTRAINTS 1037
PRINT POINT 1034
C REARRANGE 1039
RETURN 992, 1028, 1066
Code SECTION 1048
COMMON PAGE 1289 SELECT 1066
KDEBT 1289 SELECT ELEMENTS 1048
LCODE 1289 SET 1113
NCODE 1289 SHELL 1057
SOLVE 978
Command
SPLIT 1054
AVERAGE 981, 988
STRESS 1042
AVERAGE TRANSIENT 991
STRESS SECTION 1048
AVERAGING POST-PROCESSING 1099
THREE-DIMENSIONAL 1062-1063
AXES 1026
TRANSF 1027
CARD 991, 1116
TRANSIENT 1035
CLOSE 1081
UNITS 1048
COMBINE 994, 1028, 1063
USER 1048
COMBINE FOURIER 999
VISUALIZATION 1101
COMPONENTS 992
CORRECTION 981 Criterion
CROSS SECTION 1011 Drucker-Prager 1162, 1173
CURVE AVERAGE 1124 Stassi 1163, 1174
CURVE FUNCTION 1121 Tsai-Hill 1163, 1174
CURVE POST PROCESSING 1112 User 1164
CURVE SATURATION 1122 User-programmed 1174
CURVE TABULATION 1123 Von Mises 1161, 1172
CURVE TRANSIENT 1116 Cross Sections 1009
DAMPING GYROSCOPIC 1340
DEASSIGN33 1338 D
DISTRIBUTION 1062, 1064
EDGE 1014 Dataset 1085
ELEMENT 981, 1117
ELEMENTS 989, 991, 1014, 1024
EXTRACT CODES 1289 E
FORCE 1040
FORMAT 1113, 1117 Elasticity 1147
GENERATE 1062, 1064 Elastoplasticity 1159
GRID 1014
HEADER 1014, 1026
LINE 1014
I
LOAD 1048, 1063, 1066
LOCAL 1066 Isotropic Linear Elasticity 1149
MATERIALS 1025
MATRIX 1026

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
TUBE 1022
L UNBALANCE 1339
UPPER 989
Label VARIABLE 989, 1002
ALL 1040 VMISE 1023
AMPLITUDE 1001 Large Displacements and Large Strains 1247
ASYNCHRONOUS 1339
Local Axes
AXES 989
One-Dimensional Elements 1134
AXISYMMETRIC 1023
Three-Dimensional Elements 1143
BEAM 1024
Two-Dimensional Elements 1136
CARD 1035
COARSE 1066 Location of Gaussian Points for Calculation
COMPONENTS 1034 of Stress 983
COMPOSITE 1059
CRITERION HILL 1059 M
DATASET 1084, 1100
DELTA 991 Merging of Cards 1007
DISPLACEMENT 991
ENERGY 1040 Merging of Posts 1006
EXTRACT 989, 1046 Merging of Results 1003
EXTRAPOLATION 1099 Merging of Transient Files 1008
FINE 1066 Model
FORCE COMPOSITE 1024 Chaboche 1216
GYROSCOPIC 1338-1339 Generalized Maxwell Hardening (Linear
HILL 1060 Viscoelasticity 1227
INPLA 1023 Model=1, Perfect Plasticity 1172
INPUT 1100 Model=10, Ductile Damage Model with
INREV 1023 Isotropic Strain Hardening - Leblond
INTEGRAL 991 – Perrin Model 1195
INTRI 1023 Model=11, Plasticity with combined Strain-
LAST 991, 1035
Hardening - isotropic strain
LAYER 989, 1046, 1059
hardening and PRAGER kinematic
LOWER 989
strain hardening 1184
MASS 1040
Model=12, Plasticity with combined strain
MISE 1022
MODE 1035 hardening and RAMBERG-OSGOOD
MULTIPLY 1022 strain hardening law 1184
NORM 1119 Model=13, Ductile Damage Model with
ONLY 989 Combined Isotropic and Kinematic
OUTPUT 1100 Strain Hardening - Leblond – Perrin
PART 1100 Model 1196
PHASE 1001 Model=14 Gurson - Tvergaard Model 1197
PRESSURE 1099 Model=2, Plasticity with Isotropic Strain-
PRINCIPAL 1022 Hardening 1175
PRINT 1084 Model=2, Plasticity with Prager Kinematic
SHELL 989 Strain-Hardening 1179
SHELL COMPOSITE 989 Model=21 Global Perfect Elastoplasticity
SPATIAL 1012 Model Applicable to Thin Shell
STRAIN 1046 Elements - Simplified Model 1197
STRESS 991 Model=22 Global Perfect Elastoplasticity
SUM 1118 Model Applicable to Thin Shell
THIN SHELL 1023 Elements 1198
THREE DIMENSIONAL 1022
THRESHOLD 991, 1099
TRANSF 1024
TSAI 1059

© 2019 ESI Group
INDEX
Model=23 Global Elastoplasticity Model

with Kinematic Strain Hardening, R
Applicable to Thin Shell Elements -
Simplified Model 1198 Rik's Method 1305
with Kinematic Strain Hardening, S
Applicable to Thin Shell Element 1198
Model=25 Global Elastoplasticity Model Sky Line Solvers 1321
with Isotropic Strain Hardening, Standard Sparse Solvers 1322
Applicable to Thin Shell Elements - Strain-hardening 1165
Simplified Model 1199
Stresses in Laminated Shells 1046
with Isotropic Strain Hardening,
Applicable to Thin Shell Elements 1199 T
Model=4, Plasticity with Ductile Damage -
ROUSSELIER Model 1192 Three-Dimensional 1061
Model=5, Cyclic Plasticity -Von Mises
Criterion, EISENBERG Model 1184 U
Model=6, Plasticity with Kinematic Strain-
Hardening – Ramberg – Osgood User-Programmed Criterion 1168
Strain Hardening Law 1180
Model=7, Plasticity with isotropic Strain-
V
Hardening and Sensitivity to,load
Rapidity – Johnson Cook Law 1178
Model=7, Plasticity with Kinematic Strain-
Viscoelasticity 1226
Hardening RAMBERG-OSGOOD Viscoplasticity 1209
Strain Hardening Law 1177
Model=8, Cyclic Plasticity - Chaboche-
Marquis Model 1187
Model=8, Non-Linear Kinematic Strain-
Hardening Armstrong - Frederick 1180
Model=9, Ductile Damage Model with
kinematic Strain-Hardening -
Leblond – Perrin Model 1193
Non-Linear Viscoelasticity 1234
Rigid Viscoplastic 1219
Strain Hardening 1210
Thermo-Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior 1218
Thermo-Viscoelastic 1229
Time Hardening 1211
Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic 1213
Viscous 1211
N
Non-Linear Elasticity 1154
Non-Unified Elasto-Viscoplastic Models 1210
P
Postprocessing 1018

© 2019 ESI Group
ABOUT ESI GROUP
ESI Group is a leading innovator in Virtual Prototyping software and services. Specialist in material physics, ESI
has developed a unique proficiency in helping industrial manufacturers replace physical prototypes by virtual
prototypes, allowing them to virtually manufacture, assemble, test and pre- certify their future products.
Coupled with the latest technologies, Virtual Prototyping is now anchored in the wider concept of the Product
Performance Lifecycle™, which addresses the operational performance of a product during its entire lifecycle,
from launch to disposal. The creation of a Hybrid Twin™, leveraging simulation, physics and data analytics,
Copyright © ESI Group, 2019
enables manufacturers to deliver smarter and connected products, to predict product performance and to
anticipate maintenance needs.
ESI is a French company listed in compartment B of NYSE Euronext Paris. Present in more than 40 countries,
and addressing every major industrial sector, ESI Group employs about 1200 high-level specialists around the
world and reported annual sales of €141 million in 2016. For more information, please visit www.esi-group.com.
All PAM- and SYS- product names as well as other products belonging to ESI's portfolio are tradenames or trademarks of ESI Group, unless specifically mentioned.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners - Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
www.esi-group.com

SYSTUS RefManAnalysisVol4 en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SYSTUS RefManAnalysisVol4 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SYSTUS

REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

CHAPTER 13 POST PROCESSING 971

13.7 Printing of Results 1033

CHAPTER 14 POSTPROCESSING AND GRAPHIC OUTPUT 1079

- ii - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

CHAPTER 15 TOPOLOGY OF ELEMENTS 1131

CHAPTER 16 SYSTEMS OF AXES 1133

CHAPTER 17 MATERIAL BEHAVIOR LAWS 1145

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - iii -

17.9.2 General Structure of the Force File 1252

CHAPTER 18 COMMON BLOCKS 1289

CHAPTER 19 RIK'S METHOD 1305

CHAPTER 20 SECTION MANAGEMENT DATABASE 1313

CHAPTER 21 LINEAR EQUATION SOLVERS 1319

CHAPTER 22 SPACE TRANSFORMATIONS 1329

- iv - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

CHAPTER 23 DYNAMIC ELEMENTS OF ROTORS 1337

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL -v-

CHAPTER 13 POST PROCESSING

σN random access file of stresses at nodes (FAD)

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 971 -

COMBINE l linear : printing of linear combinations

MERGE l combines several permanent results files into a single file,

l if the label CARD is present, a results file is created from data

CROSS SECTION l Calculates results, including certain yield criteria, at points

- 972 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

POSTPROCESSING l Derives various types of result at nodes or at the centers of

PRINT l Prints sets of results held on the postprocessing file:

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 973 -

- 974 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 975 -

- 976 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

13.2 AVERAGE NODE STRESS AND STRAIN

elements to obtain the unique node values.

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 977 -

13.2.2 Field of Application

- 978 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

l the forces file

and creates as output files :

l the local file of node strains (εn)

These output files are included in the permanent file of results.

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 979 -

13.2.4 Method of Calculation

- 980 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

13.2.5 Input Data

The command AVERAGE

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 981 -

Let us consider the two dimensional structure shown in Figure 13.3.

- 982 - SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL

13.2.7 Location of Gaussian Points for Calculation of Stress

typeface numbers nodes of elements.

l Drawing on right: Gaussian points at which stresses are calculated.

One dimensional elements

Element with 3 nodes

Element with 4 nodes

Two dimensional elements

Element with 8 nodes

SYSTUS 2019 REFERENCE ANALYSIS MANUAL - 983 -

Element with 12 nodes

Element with 3 nodes

Element with 6 nodes

Three dimensional elements